Nav

PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0135-4300
MARCH 2001
Rev. D
Imaging and Data Products
RF-5710A
HF/LF MODEM
INTERMEDIATE MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
next level solutions
The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval.

No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government.
LIMITED ONE YEAR WARRANTY
HARRIS CORPORATION (RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION)
FROM HARRIS TO YOU This warranty is extended to the original buyer and applies to all Harris Corporation, RF
Communications Division equipment purchased and employed for the service normally intended, except those products
specifically excluded.
WHAT WE WILL DO If your Harris Corporation, RF Communications Division equipment purchased from us for use outside the
United States fails in normal use because of a defect in workmanship or materials within one year from the date of shipment, we
will repair or replace (at our option) the equipment or part without charge to you, at our factory. If the product was purchased for
use in the United States, we will repair or replace (at our option) the equipment or part without charge to you at our Authorized Repair
Center or factory.
WHAT YOU MUST DO You must notify us promptly of a defect within one year from date of shipment. Assuming that Harris
concurs that the complaint is valid, and is unable to correct the problem without having the equipment shipped to Harris:
Customers with equipment purchased for use outside the United States will be supplied with information for the return
of the defective equipment or part to our factory in Rochester, NY, U.S.A., for repair or replacement. You must prepay
all transportation, insurance, duty and customs charges. We will pay for return to you of the repaired/replaced equipment
or part, C.I.F. destination; you must pay any duty, taxes or customs charges.
Customers with equipment purchased for use in the United States must obtain a Return Authorization Number, properly
pack, insure, prepay the shipping charges and ship the defective equipment or part to our factory or to the Authorized
Warranty Repair Center indicated by us.
Harris Corporation Telephone: (716) 244-5830

RF Communications Division Fax: 716-242-4755
Customer Service http://www.harris.com
1680 University Avenue
Rochester, NY 14610, U.S.A.
Harris will repair or replace the defective equipment or part and pay for its return to you, provided the repair or replacement is due
to a cause covered by this warranty.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED We regret that we cannot be responsible for:
Defects or failures caused by buyer or user abuse or misuse.
Defects or failures caused by unauthorized attempts to repair or alter the equipment in any way.
Consequential damages incurred by a buyer or user from any cause whatsoever, including, but not limited to
transportation, non-Harris repair or service costs, downtime costs, costs for substituting equipment or loss of anticipated
profits or revenue.
The performance of the equipment when used in combination with equipment not purchased from Harris.
HARRIS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES BEYOND THE EXPRESS WARRANTY AS CONTAINED HEREIN. ALL
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY ARE
EXCLUDED.
SERVICE WARRANTY Any repair service performed by Harris under this limited warranty is warranted to be free from defects
in material or workmanship for sixty days from date of repair. All terms and exclusions of this limited warranty apply to the service
warranty.
IMPORTANT Customers who purchased equipment for use in the United States must obtain a Return Authorization Number
before shipping the defective equipment to us. Failure to obtain a Return Authorization Number before shipment may result in a
delay in the repair/replacement and return of your equipment.
IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS Concerning this warranty or equipment sales or services, please contact our Customer Service
Department.
PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0135-4300
MARCH 2001
Rev. D
RF-5710A
HF/LF MODEM
The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or

re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government.
Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information
and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without
the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, RF Communications Division, 1680 University
Avenue, Rochester, New York 14610-1887.
Copyright 2001
By Harris Corporation
All Rights Reserved
HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 716-244-5830. Fax: 716-242-4755. http://www.harris.com
RF-5710A HF/LF MODEM
When an Adult Stops Breathing

WARNING
DO NOT attempt to perform the rescue breathing techniques provided
on this page, unless certified. Performance of these techniques by
uncertified personnel could result in further injury or death to the victim.
1 Does the Person

Respond?
Tap or gently shake
2 Shout, Help!
Call people who can
victim. phone for help.
Shout, Are you OK?
3 Roll Person
Onto Back
Roll victim toward you
by pulling slowly.
4 Open Airway
Tilt head back and lift
5 Check for
Breathing
Look, listen, and feel
chin. for breathing for
3 to 5 seconds.
6 Give 2 Full
Breaths
Keep head tilted back.
Pinch nose shut.
Seal your lips tight
around victims mouth.
Give 2 full breaths for
1 to 1-1/2 seconds each.
7 Check for Pulse

at Side of Neck
Feel for pulse for
8 Phone for Help
Send someone to call
5 to 10 seconds. an ambulance.
9 Begin Rescue
Breathing
10

Recheck Pulse
Every Minute
Lift chin. Feel for pulse for
Pinch nose shut. 5 to 10 seconds.
Give 1 full breath If victim has pulse but is
every 5 seconds. not breathing, continue
Look, listen, and feel for rescue breathing. If no
breathing between pulse, begin CPR.
breaths.
For more information about these and other lifesaving techniques, contact your Red Cross chapter for training.
When Breathing Stops reproduced with permission from an American Red Cross Poster.
ii
List of Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Term
A, AMP Ampere(s)
ac, AC Alternating Current
ACE Advanced Crypto Engine
A/D Analog-to-Digital
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter
ADDR Address
ADP Automated Data Processing
ADT Administrative Delay Time, Automated Data Terminal
ADU Automatic Dialing Unit
AF Audio Frequency
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AFSK Audio Frequency Shift Keying
A-G, A/G Air-to-Ground
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIC Analog Interface Chip
ALC Automatic Level Control
ALE Automatic Link Establishment
AMD Automatic Message Display
AM Amplitude Modulation
AME Amplitude Modulation Equivalent
ANT Antenna
ANTIVOX Voice-Operated Transmitter Key Inhibitor
API Analog Phase Interpolation
ARQ Automatic Repeat on Request
ASI Analog Signal Interface
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK Amplitude Shift Keying
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATE Automatic Test Equipment
AUD Audio
AUX Auxiliary
iii
List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

Abbreviation Term
AVS Analog Voice Security
AWG American Wire Gauge
B/A Buffer Amplifier
BC Broadcast, Binary Counter
BCD Binary-Coded Decimal
BD Baud, Binary Decoder
BER Bit Error Rate
BFO Beat-Frequency Oscillator
BIT Built-In Test
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
BPI Bits Per Inch
bps Bits Per Second
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying
Btu British Thermal Unit
BW Bandwidth
CARC Chemical Agent Resistive Coating
CB Circuit Breaker
CBIT Continuous Built-In Test
CCW Counterclockwise
CDR Critical Design Review
CDRL Contract Data Requirements List
CFE Contractor-Furnished Equipment
CH, CHAN Channel
CI Configuration Item
CKT Circuit
cm Centimeter
CMOS Complimentary-Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
CNTL Control
CODEC Coder-Decoder
CPU Central Processing Unit
CR Carriage Return
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
iv

Abbreviation Term
CSM Crypto Synch Message
CSMA Carrier Sense Media Access
CTRL Control
CTS Clear to Send
CW Continuous Wave, Clockwise
D/A Digital-to-Analog
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DAM Direct Access Memory
dB Decibel(s)
dBm Decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt
dc, DC Direct Current
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DE Data Encryption
Demod Demodulated
Diff Differential
Dip, DIP Dual In-Line Package
DMM Digital Multimeter
DP Double Pole
DPDT Double Pole, Double Throw
D8PSK Differential Eight Phase Shift Keying
DPRAM Dual-Port RAM
DPST Double Pole, Single Throw
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DSR Data Set Ready
DTL Diode Transistor Logic
DTM Data Text Message
DV Digitized Voice
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DUART Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
DUSART Dual Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
DVM Digital Voltmeter
v

Abbreviation Term
DVOM Digital Volt-Ohm Meter
EAL External Audio Level
EAM Embedded Adaptive Module
EAROM Electronically Alterable Read Only Memory
ECM Electronic Counter Measure
ECCM Electronic Counter-Counter Measure
EEPROM, Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
E2PROM
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EOM End of Message
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FD Full Duplex
FEC Forward Error Correction
FET Field-Effect Transistor
F/F Flip-Flop
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FH Frequency Hopping
FOC Frequency Offset Carriers
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
F/W, FW Firmware
G-A, G/A Ground-to-Air
GF Government (or customer) Furnished
GFE Government-Furnished Equipment
Gnd, GND Ground
GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus
GPS Global Positioning System
HD Half Duplex
HDCP Harris Data Communications Protocol
HF High Frequency
HSS High-Speed Synchronizer
vi

Abbreviation Term
HSSB High-Speed Serial Bus
HWCI Hardware Configuration Item
Hz Hertz
IC Integrated Circuit
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
ID Identification
IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame
IF Intermediate Frequency
INT Interrupt
INTLK Interlock
INTR Interrupt
I/O Input/Output
ISB Independent Sideband
J Joules
k Kilo (thousand)
kbyte Kilobyte
kHz Kilohertz
km Kilometer(s)
kV Kilovolt(s)
kVA Kilovolt Ampere(s)
KVD Keyboard Visual Display
KVDU Keyboard Visual Display Unit
kW Kilowatt(s)
LBT Listen Before Transmit
LC Inductive Capacitive
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Lock Detect
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LF Low Frequency
LLSB Lower Lower Sideband
L.O. Local Oscillator
vii

Abbreviation Term
LOS Line of Sight
LP Low Pass
LPC Linear Predictive Coding
LQA Link Quality Analysis
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSB Lower Sideband
LSD Least Significant Digit
M Meter, Mega (one million)
m Milli, one-one thousandth
mA Milliampere(s)
Mbyte Megabyte
MDM MODEM
MHz Megahertz
MIC Microphone
MIL-STD Military Standard
mm Millimeter(s)
Mod Modification, Modulated
Mod/Demod Modulator/Demodulator
Modem Modulator/Demodulator
MOS Metal Oxide Semiconductor
MOSFET Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
ms, msec Millisecond
MSK Minimum Shift Keying
MTBCF Mean Time Between Critical Failure
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTBM Mean Time Between Maintenance
MTBR Mean Time Between Replacement
MTTR Mean Time to Repair
MUF Maximum Usable Frequency
Mux Multiplex, Multiplexer
mVac Millivolts Alternating Current
viii

Abbreviation Term
mVdc Millivolts Direct Current
n Nano (1 x 109)
NB Narrowband
NC, N.C. Normally Closed
N/C Not Connected
NMOS N-channel Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
NO, N.O. Normally Open
No. Number
NPN N-type, P-type, N-type (transistor)
nsec Nanoseconds
NVG Night Vision Goggles
W Ohms, a unit of resistance measurement
O&M Operation and Maintenance
O&R Operation and Repair
O.C. Open Circuit or Open Collector
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
Op Amp Operational Amplifier
OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator
p Pico
PA Power Amplifier
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PBIT Power-On Built-In Test
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PEP Peak Envelope Power
pF Picofarad (1 x 1012 Farads)
PIV Peak Inverse Voltage
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PNP P-type, N-type, P-type (transistor)
P-P Peak-to-Peak
ix

Abbreviation Term
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PS Power Supply
Pt Pt, Pt-Pt Point-to-Point
PTT Push-to-Talk
PWB Printed Wiring Board
QTY Quantity
R, RG Receiver Circuit: Receive, Receive Ground (from teletype)
RAD Random Access Data
RAM Random Access Memory
RC Resistive Capacitive
RCU Remote Control Unit
RCV/RX Receive
RCVR Receiver
RD Read
RDY Ready
REC Receptacle
RETX Retransmit
RF Radio Frequency
RFI Radio-Frequency Interference
RLPA Rotatable Log Periodic Antenna
RLSD Receive Level Sense Detect
RMS Root Mean Squared
ROM Read-Only Memory
RSSI Receive Signal Strength Indicator
RST Reset
R/T Receive/Transmit
RTC Real Time Clock
RTN Return
RTS Request to Send
RTTY Radio Teletype
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
x

Abbreviation Term
S, SG Send Circuit, Send Ground (to teletype)
SA Spectrum Analyzer
SB Sideband
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
SHLD Shield
SINAD A ratio of (signal + noise + distortion) to (noise + distortion) used to measure
the signal quality of a communication channel. SINAD is commonly used to
evaluate the ability of a channel to pass voice traffic.
Sip, SIP Single In-Line Package
SMD Surface-Mount Device
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SOM Start of Message
SP Single Pole
SPDT Single-Pole, Double-Throw
SRU Shop Replaceable Unit
SSB Single Sideband
ST Single Throw
SWR Standing Wave Ratio
SYNC Synchronous
TB Terminal Board
TCXO Temperature Controlled Crystal Oscillator
TD Time-Division Multiple Access
TDQPSK Time Differential Quaternary Phase Shift Keying
TGC Transmitter Gain Control
T/R Transmit/Receive
TT Teletype
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
TT VFT Teletype Voice Frequency Tone
TTY Teletype
TX Transmit
u Micro (1 x 106)
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
xi

Abbreviation Term
uF Microfarad (1 x 106 Farads)
UHF Ultra High Frequency
USART Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
USB Upper Sideband
usec Microseconds
UUSB Upper Upper Sideband
UUT Unit Under Test
uW Microwave
V Volt
VA Volt-Ampere
Vac Volts, Alternating Current
VCA Voltage Controlled Attenuator
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VDC, Vdc Volts, Direct Current
VDU Video Display Unit
VECT Vector
VF Voice Frequency
VFO Variable Frequency Oscillator
VFR Voice Frequency Repeater
VHF Very High Frequency
VLF Very Low Frequency
VMOS V-groove Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
VOM Volt-Ohm-Meter
VOX Voice Operated Transmitter
Vpp Volts peak-to-peak
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
W Watt(s)
WRL Wire Run List
XCVR Transceiver
XMTR Transmitter
xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 MAINTENANCE LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Level I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.2 Level II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.3 Level III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.4 Level IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5 GENERAL EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5.1 Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5.1.1 Ancillary Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5.1.2 Unit Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5.2 General System Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6 FIRMWARE UPGRADE CAPABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.7 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.8 PARTS LIST OF ITEMS SHIPPED WITH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.9 LIST OF ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 SITE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.2 General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.3.1 Base Station Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.4 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 UNPACKING AND REPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4.2 Repacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.5 SITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.5.1 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.2 Ancillary Items Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.3 Installation and Interconnect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.4 Jumper/DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.5 Rack Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.5.1 Modem Rack Mount Using Standard Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.5.2 Single Modem Rack Mount Using Heavy Duty Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.5.5.3 Dual Modem Rack Mount Using Heavy Duty Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.6 RF-5710A MODEM REAR PANEL CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.6.1 Ethernet Connector J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Continued

2.6.2 DTE Connector J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.6.3 Remote Connector J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.6.4 Radio Connectors J4 & J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.6.5 AC Power Connector J6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.7 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.8 CONNECTING THE RF-5710A MODEM TO THE DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.9 SETTING MODEM OPERATING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.9.1 Programming Modem Waveform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.9.2 Asynchronous DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.9.3 Synchronous DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.10 SENDING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.11 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.11.1 Phase 1 Installation Inspection and Pre-Power Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.11.2 Phase 2 Initial Turn-On and Preliminary Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.11.3 Phase 3 Installation Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 MODEM POWER UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.4 RF-5710A MODEM SELF-TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.5 OPERATIONAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.5.1 SERIAL Tone (MIL-STD-188-110B) Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5.1.1 Serial Tone Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5.1.2 Serial Tone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5.1.3 Transmit Keyline Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.5.1.4 Receive Signal Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.5.2 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Operation
(RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.2.1 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.2.2 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Operation
(RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.3 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.5.3.1 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.5.3.2 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.5.4 39TONE Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.5.4.1 39Tone Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.5.4.2 39TONE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
xiv
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION Continued

3.5.5 STANAG 4539 Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.5.5.1 STANAG 4539 Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.5.5.2 STANAG 4539 Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.5.6 STANAG 5066 Annex G Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only) . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.5.6.1 STANAG 5066 Annex G Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.5.6.2 STANAG 5066 Annex G Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.5.7.1 STANAG 5065 Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.7.2 STANAG 5065 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.5.8 STANAG 4529 Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.5.11 STANAG 4285 Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.5.12 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.5.12.1 FSK Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.5.12.2 FSK Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.5.12.4 FSK Variable Shift Mode Operation Adjusting Mark and Space Frequencies 3-44
3.5.12.5 Receive Frequency Offset Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.5.12.6 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.5.13 Setup Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page

3.5.13.1 SETUP Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.1.1 Duplex (Full, Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.2 SETUP 5066G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.2.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.2.2 Acquisition on Data (OFF, ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.3 SETUP 4539 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.3.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.3.2 Acquisition on Data (Off, On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.5.13.3.3 TX TLC Blocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.13.3.4 RX Block Limit (059999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.13.3.5 Send TX EOM (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.13.3.6 RX AGC (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.13.3.7 RX AGC LEVEL (10, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.13.3.8 DEACQUIRE (FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW, VERY SLOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.13.3.9 DOPPLER (FAST/SLOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.13.4 SETUP 110B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.13.4.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.13.4.3 TX TLC Blocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.13.4.4 RX Block Limit (059999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.13.4.5 Send TX EOM (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.13.4.6 RX AGC (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.5.13.4.7 RX AGC LEVEL (10, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.5.13.5 SETUP 110BF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.5.13.5.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.5.13.5.3 TX TLC Blocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.5.13.5.4 RX Block Limit (059999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.5.13.5.5 Send TX EOM (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.5.13.5.6 RX AGC (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.5.13.5.7 RX AGC LEVEL (10, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.5.13.6 SETUP 5065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.6.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.6.2 TX Carrier (Normal/Always On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.7 SETUP 4529 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.7.1 Duplex (Full, Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.7.2 RX Tone (800, 850, . . ., 2350, 2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.7.3 TX Tone (800, 850, . . ., 2350, 2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.8 SETUP 4481 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.5.13.8.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
xvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page

3.5.13.9 SETUP 4415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.9.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.10 SETUP 4285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.10.1 Duplex (Full, Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.11 Setup 39Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.11.1 Duplex (Full/Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.11.3 Diversity (Time/Freq, Freq) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.5.13.11.4 Preamble (Long, Short) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.12 SETUP FSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.12.1 Duplex (Full, Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.13 SETUP Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.13.1 Electrical (RS-232, RS-422, RS-423, MIL-STD-188-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.13.2 Synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.13.2.1 Polarity (NORMAL, INVERTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.13.2.2 Transmit Clock Source (INT, EXT, DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.5.13.13.3 Asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.13.3.1 Polarity (NORMAL, INVERTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.13.3.2 Rate (50, 75, 100, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200 bps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.13.3.3 Stop Bits (1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.13.3.4 Parity (Odd, Even, None) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.13.3.5 Character Length (5, 6, 7, 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.13.3.6 Flow Control (CTS, XON/XOFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.14 SETUP Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.5.13.14.1 Multidrop (Off, On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.5.13.14.2 Applicable Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.5.13.14.3 Electrical (RS-232, RS-422, RS-422-NT, RS-423, RS-485,
RS-485-NT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.5.13.14.4 Rate (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.14.5 Stop Bits (1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.14.6 Parity (Odd, Even, None) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.14.7 Character Length (7, 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.15 SETUP Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.15.1 Backlight (On, Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.15.2 Contrast Level (0 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.16 SETUP Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.16.1 TX Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.16.2 TX Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.5.13.17 SETUP Keyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5.13.18 SETUP DTE Activity Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5.13.18.1 Activity Mode (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5.13.18.2 Transmit Start (DATA/RTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5.13.18.3 Sync Start Data (16-Bit Pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5.13.18.4 Sync Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
xvii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page

3.5.13.18.5 Async Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5.13.18.6 Bid-CTS (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.6 CHANGING FROM LOCAL CONTROL TO REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.7 CHANGING FROM REMOTE CONTROL TO LOCAL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.8 VERSIONS MODE AND CHECKSUM VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.9 RF-5710A MODEM RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.10 PRESET MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.10.1 Saving a PRESET Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.10.2 Loading a PRESET Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.11 REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.11.1 Point-to-Point Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.11.1.1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.11.1.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.11.1.3 Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.11.1.4 Command Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.11.1.5 Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.1.6 Multiple Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.1.7 BITE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.1.8 Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.1.9 Status Only Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.1.10 Local to Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.2 Multidrop Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.2.1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.2.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.3 Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.4 Command Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.5 Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.6 Multiple Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.7 BITE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.8 Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.9 Status Only Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.2.10 Local to Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.3 Remote Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.3.1 Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.11.3.2 Valid Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.11.3.3 Default Factory Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.11.3.4 Miscellaneous Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.11.3.5 Example of Configuring the Waveform and Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.11.3.6 Example of Configuring FSK 50 BPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.12 SHOW (SH) AND HELP (HE OR ?) MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
xviii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 OVERALL FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.2 Purpose of the RF-5710A Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.3 Simplified Functional Level Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.3.1 Transmit Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.3.2 Receive Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 MAJOR FUNCTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.1 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.2 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.3 HF Modem Circuit Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.3.1 RF-5710A Modem Control Processor (MCP) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.3.2 DSP Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.3.3 HF Radio Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.3.4 Data Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.3.5 Remote Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3.3.5.1 Applicable Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3.3.5.2 Electrical (RS-232, RS-422, RS-422-NT, RS-423, RS-485, RS-485-NT) . . . . 4-6
4.3.3.5.3 Firmware Upgrade Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.4 Waveform Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.4.1 STANAG 5065 Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.4.2 STANAG 5066, Annex G Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.4.3 MIL-STD-188-110B Serial Tone Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.4.4 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode (110B Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.4.5 STANAG 4539 Annex B Section 4 Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.4.6 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F High Data Rate Mode (110B-F Mode) . . . . . 4-8
4.3.4.7 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39TONE Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.4.8 STANAG 4285 Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.4.9 STANAG 4529 Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.4.10 STANAG 4415 NATO Robust Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.4.11 STANAG 4481-P AND -F Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.4.12 Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.5 Radio Interface Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.5.1 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3.5.2 Remote Control Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
CHAPTER 5 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Scheduled Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
xix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Scope of this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Run-Time Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.3 Maintenance Turn-On Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.4 Non-BIT Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.4.1 Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.5 BIT Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.6 Troubleshooting Analysis Procedures (TAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING SUPPORT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.1 Protective Device Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.2 Relay and Lamp Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.4 CHASSIS CONNECTOR PINOUT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
CHAPTER 7 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Master Tools and Materials List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3.2 Level III Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3.3 Attaching Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3.4 Repair Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3.5 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4 SRU AND FUSE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4.1 A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4.1.1 A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4.1.2 A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.4.2 A2 Power Supply Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.4.2.1 A2 Power Supply Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4.2.2 A2 Power Supply Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4.3 A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.4.3.1 A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.4.3.2 A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.4.4 A5 Front Panel Assembly Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.4.4.1 A5 Front Panel Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.4.4.2 A5 Front Panel Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4.5 F1 Internal Fuse Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.5.1 F1 Internal Fuse Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.5.2 F1 Internal Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
xx
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 7 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE Continued

7.4.6 F2 External Fuse Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4.6.1 F2 External Fuse Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4.6.2 F2 External Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
CHAPTER 8 PARTS LIST

8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 SHOP REPLACEABLE UNITS (SRUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3 PARTS LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
1-1 RF-5710A HF/LF Modem
1-2 Maintenance Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 RF-5710A Modem Family Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-4 RF-5710A Modem MD002 General System Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
2-1 RF-5710A Modem Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 RF-5710A Modem Rack Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 RF-5710A Modem Heavy Duty Rack Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 Locations of Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 Primary Radio Interface Cable (Balanced Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-6 Primary Radio Interface Cable (Unbalanced Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-7 Synchronous DTE Interface Cable
(RS-232D/RS-423/MIL-STD-188-114 Unbalanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-8 Synchronous DTE Interface Cable (RS-422 Balanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3-1 RF-5710A Modem Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Changing RF-5710A Operational Modes and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 SERIAL Tone Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-4 Serial Tone Mode Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-5 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-6 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-7 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-8 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-9 39TONE Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-10 39TONE Mode Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-11 STANAG 4539 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-12 STANAG 4539 Mode Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-13 STANAG 5066 Annex G Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-14 STANAG 5066 Annex G Mode Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-15 STANAG 5065M Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
xxi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES Continued

Figure Page
3-16 STANAG 5065-F Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-17 STANAG 5065 Mode Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-18 STANAG 4529 Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-20 STANAG 4481-P Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-21 STANAG 4481F Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-27 FSK Mode Front Panel Display (FSKWS, FSKNS, FSKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-28 FSK Mode Operation Flowchart (FSKWS, FSKNS, FSKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-29 FSK Variable (FSKV) Mode Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-30 FSK Variable Shift Mode (FSKV) Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-31 RTS/CTS Signal Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3-32 SETUP OPTIONS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3-33 Show Menu (Serial Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3-34 RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (Serial Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3-35 RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (FSK Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3-36 RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (STANAG 4285 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3-37 RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (STANAG 4529 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3-38 Async and Sync Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3-39 HELP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3-40 RF-5710A Modem Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-41 Remote Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
4-1 Modem Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Keyline Delay Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
6-1 Troubleshooting Process Used in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 RF-5710A Modem Interconnect Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7-1 RF-5710A Modem Master Connection and Hardware Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8-1 RF-5710A Modem Illustrated Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
xxii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 RF-5710A Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1-2 RF-5710A Modem Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 Typical Waveform Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 Signal-to-Noise Ratio Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-5 Major Assemblies and Reference Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 Parts List of Item Shipped With the RF-5710A Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-7 List of Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-8 Test Equipment Required, But Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-9 Master Required Tools and Materials List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2-1 HF Data Modem Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-2 DTE Connector J2 Pin Numbers and Signals for Unbalanced
RS-232D/RS-423/MIL-STD-188-114 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-3 DTE Connector J2 Pin Numbers and Signals for Balanced RS-422
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-4 Remote Connector J3 Pin Numbers and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-5 Primary Radio Connector J4 Pin Numbers and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-6 Secondary Radio Connector J5 Pin Numbers and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7 Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3-1 RF-5710A Modem Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 RF-5710A Operational Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-3 Waveform Data Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-4 Recommended Minimum Separation Between Mark and Space
Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-5 Remote Port Settings (Front Panel Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-6 Remote Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3-7 Functions Available for Waveform Type Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3-8 Default Factory Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-9 Default Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-10 Default Modem 39TONE Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-11 Miscellaneous Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3-12 Configuring the Waveform and Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3-13 Configuring FSK 50 BPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
4-1 Minimum Timing Diagram Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2 Radio Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
5-1 Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
6-1 Non-BIT Fault Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
7-1 SRU and Fuse Removal and Replacement Paragraph References . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 Master Tools and Materials List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
8-1 List of RF-5710A Modem SRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2 RF-5710A Modem Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-3 RF-5710A Modem Ancillary Kit Parts List (12004-0021-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-4 RF-5710A Modem Rack Mount Kit Parts List (12004-0100-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-5 RF-5710A Modem Miscellaneous Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-6 List of Attaching Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
xxiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This page intentionally left blank.
xxiv
SAFETY SUMMARY
SAFETY SUMMARY
1. INTRODUCTION
All operators and maintenance personnel must observe the following safety precautions during operation and
maintenance of this equipment. Specific warnings and cautions are provided in the manual and at the end of this
Safety Summary. Warnings, Cautions, and Notes appear before various steps in the manual and will be used as
follows:
WARNING Used when injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment is possible
CAUTION Used when there is a possibility of damage to equipment
NOTE Used to alert personnel to a condition that requires emphasis
2. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY

Basic safety precautions consider factors involved in protecting personnel from injury or death. Electrical,
mechanical, electromagnetic radiation (EMR), material, or chemical hazards are the most common types of
hazards found in electronic equipment. The following are types of hazards that may exist:
ELECTRICAL Hazardous voltage and current levels may exist throughout the equipment. Contact
with these hazards could cause electrocution, electrical shock, burns, or injury due to
involuntary reflexes of the body.
MECHANICAL Mechanical hazards are created when heavy assemblies and components must be
removed and replaced. Moving parts (such as fan blades) and hot surfaces are
potential mechanical hazards.
THERMAL Burn hazards may exist in the equipment that could cause personal injuries and/or
serious equipment damage. Internal surfaces of the equipment may be in excess of
65C, the point at which personnel could be burned. Extreme caution should be used
when working with any hot assemblies (for example, power supply or power amplifier
assemblies). Physical injury or damage may result to personnel and/or equipment as a
result of a reflex action to a burn.
CHEMICAL Chemicals or materials used for servicing the equipment may present potential
hazards. Many chemical agents, such as cleaners and solvents, may be toxic, volatile,
or flammable. If used incorrectly, these agents can cause injury or death.
EMR Overexposure to electromagnetic radiation results from amplified radio frequencies
that may produce a health hazard.
3. OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE SAFETY GUIDELINES
Good safety discipline is critical to prevent injury to personnel. All other safety measures are useless if personnel
do not observe the safety precautions and do not follow safety disciplines. Once aware of a hazard, personnel
should ensure that all other personnel are aware of the hazard. The following basic safety disciplines are stressed:
a. Read a procedure entirely before performing it. Personnel must always perform each assigned task in a
safe manner.
b. Prior to applying equipment power after maintenance, personnel must ensure that all unsecured hand
tools and test equipment are disconnected from the serviced/maintained equipment and properly stored.
xxv
SAFETY SUMMARY
c. Power to the equipment must be removed before a piece of equipment is removed.
d. Extreme care must be used when adjusting or working on operating equipment. Voltages in excess of
70 V or current sources in excess of 25 A are covered with barriers. Barriers include warning information
about the hazard encountered upon barrier removal.
e. Personnel must react when someone is being electrically shocked. Perform the following steps:
1. Shut off power.
2. Call for help.
3. Administer first aid if qualified.
Under no circumstances should a person come directly in contact with the body unless the power has
been removed. When immediate removal of the power is not possible, personnel must use a
non-conductive material to try to jolt or pry the body away from the point of shock.
f. Personnel should work with one hand whenever possible to prevent electrical current from passing
through vital organs of the body. In addition, personnel must never work alone. Someone must be
available in the immediate area to render emergency first aid, if necessary.
g. Lifting can cause injury. Items weighing more than 37 pounds must be lifted by two or more people.
h. Some electrolytic capacitors contain aluminum oxide or tantalum. If connected incorrectly, the capacitor
will explode when power is applied. Extreme care must be used when replacing and connecting these
capacitors. The capacitor terminals must always be connected using the correct polarity: positive to
positive and negative to negative.
The next section contains general safety precautions not directly related to specific procedures or equipment.
These precautions are oriented toward the maintenance technician. However, all personnel must understand and
apply these precautions during the many phases of operation and maintenance of the equipment. The following
precautions must be observed:
DO NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT ALONE

Never work on electrical equipment unless another person familiar with the operation and hazards of the
equipment is near. When the maintenance technician is aided by operators, ensure that operators are aware of
the hazards.
GROUNDING
Always ensure that all equipment and assemblies are properly grounded when operating or servicing.
TURN OFF POWER AND GROUND CAPACITORS

Whenever possible, power to equipment should be turned off before beginning work on the equipment. Be
sure to ground all capacitors that are potentially dangerous.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

Operators and maintainers must observe all safety regulations at all times. Do not change components or
make adjustments inside equipment with a high voltage supply on unless required by the procedure. Under
certain conditions, dangerous potentials may exist in circuits with power controls off, due to charges retained
by capacitors.
xxvi
SAFETY SUMMARY
DO NOT BYPASS INTERLOCKS

Do not bypass any interlocks unnecessarily. If it is necessary to employ an interlock bypass for equipment
servicing, use extreme care not to come in contact with hazardous voltages.
USE CARE HANDLING HEAVY EQUIPMENT

Never attempt to lift large assemblies or equipment without knowing their weight. Use enough personnel or a
mechanical lifting device to properly handle the item without causing personal injury.
HEED WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Specific warnings and cautions are provided to ensure the safety and protection of personnel and equipment.
Be familiar with and strictly follow all warnings and cautions on the equipment and in technical manuals.
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
All personnel must wear protective eyewear when servicing or maintaining equipment. Protective eyewear
must be worn at all times when using tools.
4. PROTECTION OF STATIC-SENSITIVE DEVICES
Diode input-protection is provided on all CMOS devices. This protection is designed to guard against adverse
electrical conditions such as electrostatic discharge. Although most static-sensitive devices contain protective
circuitry, several precautionary steps should be taken to avoid the application of potentially damaging
voltages to the inputs of the device.
To protect static-sensitive devices from damage, the following precautions should be observed.
a. Keep all static-sensitive devices in their protective packaging until needed. This packaging is
conductive and should provide adequate protection for the device. Storing or transporting these
devices in conventional plastic containers could be destructive to the device.
b. Disconnect power prior to insertion or extraction of these devices. This also applies to PWBs
containing such devices.
c. Double check test equipment voltages and polarities prior to conducting any tests.
d. Avoid contact with the leads of the device. The component should always be handled carefully by
the ends or side opposite the leads.
e. Avoid contact between PWB circuits or component leads and synthetic clothing.
f. Use only soldering irons and tools that are properly grounded. Ungrounded soldering tips or tools
can destroy these devices. SOLDERING GUNS MUST NEVER BE USED.
xxvii
SAFETY SUMMARY
5. EXPLANATION OF HAZARD SYMBOLS
The symbol of drops of a liquid onto a hand shows that the material will cause burns or
irritation of human skin or tissue.
The symbol of a person wearing goggles shows that the material will injure your eyes.
The symbol of a flame shows that a material can ignite and burn you.
The symbol of a skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or a danger to life.
The symbol of a human figure in a cloud shows that vapors of a material present danger to your
life or health.
xxviii
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF-5710A
HF/LF MODEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
Figure 1-1. RF-5710A HF/LF Modem

GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
All safety precautions necessary for the protection of personnel and the equipment are cross-referenced here. The
WARNING or CAUTION is referenced to the paragraph number where it is used in the manual, and a brief
subject phrase indicating the content is provided. It is recommended that these items be read in their entirety
before performing the referenced procedure. References are as follows:
CAUTION Paragraph 2.2.3.1 Do not daisy chain ground connections.
WARNING Paragraph 2.5.1 Use proper grounding before energizing equipment.
WARNING Paragraph 7.3.1 Voltages hazardous to human life are present.
CAUTION Paragraph 7.3.2 Some assemblies in the RF-5710A Modem can be damaged by static
discharge.
CAUTION Paragraph 7.3.5 Use the correct tool.
CAUTION Paragraph 7.4.1 Safeguard cables from being pinched or damaged while removing and
replacing assemblies.
CAUTION Paragraph 7.4.1 A1 HF Modem Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Assembly can be damaged
by static discharge.
CAUTION Paragraph 7.4.1.1 Do not pull on flex cable.
discharge.
discharge.
discharge.
1-1
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION Paragraph 7.4.4.1 Do not pull on flex cable.
discharge.
1.2 MAINTENANCE LEVELS
Harris/RF Communications designs its products and systems to be supported by up to four maintenance levels.
See Figure 1-2. Each maintenance level relies on a defined set of support documentation and equipment in order
to fulfill its maintenance tasks. The tasks performed at each level grow in complexity as fault isolation is
narrowed to the component causing the fault. This concept assists the maintainer by supplying only the
information and materials required for that maintenance level. These levels may be combined to sustain any
particular user maintenance philosophy. The four maintenance levels are:
1.2.1 Level I
This level is restricted to fault recognition and detection. Fault isolation is not usually performed at this level. An
operator who detects a faulty condition alerts Maintenance Level II for repair.
1.2.2 Level II
The maintenance technician repairs the radio system by utilizing a System (Level II) Manual to fault isolate to the
faulty unit (for example: receiver-transmitter, power amplifier, antenna coupler, etc.). The faulty Line Replaceable
Unit (LRU) is replaced with a spare and sent to Maintenance Level III.
1.2.3 Level III
The faulty unit is serviced at a facility that has support equipment available, typically a hot test bed radio system.
The suspected faulty unit is inserted into the hot test bed radio system and troubleshot down to the faulty
assembly using a Maintenance (Level III) Manual. The faulty Shop Replaceable Unit (SRU) or module is
replaced with a spare and passed to Maintenance Level IV.
1.2.4 Level IV
The faulty SRU or module is returned to Harris/RF Communications for repair. If Level IV maintenance
capabilities are available on site, the maintenance technician can identify the faulty component on the SRU using
a Depot Maintenance (Level IV) Manual that outlines the electronic maintenance techniques and test fixtures
necessary to repair the SRU.
1-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
START
NORMAL
OPERATION
LEVEL I
SYSTEM YES
REPAIRED
OPERATIONAL
SYSTEM
NO NO
TECHNICIAN YES
REPLACES UNIT SYSTEM
OR CABLE OPERATIONAL
LEVEL II
DEFECTIVE REPAIRED
UNIT UNIT
NO
REPAIRED
UNIT
YES
TECHNICIAN REPLACES UNIT
MODULE OPERATIONAL
LEVEL III
DEFECTIVE
MODULE
NO
LEVEL IV REPAIRED
MODULE
TECHNICIAN REPAIRS UNIT/MODULE YES

MODULE OPERATIONAL
5032E-001
Figure 1-2. Maintenance Flow Chart
1-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.3 PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual provides the maintainer with all technical information required to support Level III maintenance as
described in Paragraph 1.2.3.
The overall intent of this manual is to help the maintainer expedite repair of the unit in a reasonable amount of
time, resulting in reduced down-time and increased system availability. Detailed information that will be useful to
the maintainer is provided: unit configuration, equipment specifications, fault isolation and repair techniques,
required tools and test equipment, and functional descriptions of assemblies.
1.4 WARRANTY
Harris Corporation guarantees that if the modem fails from normal use within one year from the date of shipment
due to a defect in workmanship or materials, Harris will repair or replace the radio at no charge. Repairs made by
Harris to the radio under this warranty are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 60
days from the date of repair.
For information on how to process a claim under this warranty, and on what is not covered by this warranty, refer
to the warranty information printed on the inside front cover of this manual.
1.5 GENERAL EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
The RF-5710A Modem is shown in Figure 1-1. Table 1-1 identifies the RF-5710A Modem configurations
described in this manual.
The Harris RF-5710A series of HF/LF modems are designed to operate with conventional Single Sideband
(SSB-HF) transmitters/receivers and provide reliable high-speed communications over HF radio circuits. They are
significantly enhanced versions of the industry standard RF-5710 Modem and have both increased processing
power and additional memory to accommodate the latest generation of high-speed adaptively-equalized HF
waveforms. The waveforms supported by the different models are listed in Table 1-2.
The RF-5710A series modems are compliant with the waveform and performance requirements of US
MIL-STD-188-110B Main body waveform, US MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39-Tone Waveform, US
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix C High Data Rate Mode, US MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F High Data Rate
ISB Mode, STANAG 4285, STANAG 4481, STANAG 4529, STANAG 4415, STANAG 5065, STANAG 5066
Annex G, and STANAG 4539 Annex B High Data Rate Mode (e. g. section 4). The wide choice of interoperable
US MIL-STD and NATO (STANAG) waveforms allows the optimum waveform to be selected for a particular
application.
NOTE
For the remainder of this manual, the waveform known as US
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix C High data Rate Mode and
STANAG 4539 Annex B High Data Rate Mode (e.g. section 4)
will be referred to simply as STANAG 4539. Furthermore, all
US MIL-STD waveforms will be referred to as MIL-STD
waveform.
The high-speed adaptively equalized waveforms (STANAG 4285/4481/4529/4539/5066, MIL-STD-188-110A
and MIL-STD-188-110B) make use of a powerful adaptive equalizer to eliminate the effects of HF intersymbol,
interference, and fading. These factors normally limit the rate at which data can be sent reliably over HF radio
channels to a few tens of bits per second. However, the use of the Data Directed Equalizer (Harris patent) allows
reliable transmission at rates up to 9600 bps (SSB) and 19200 bps (ISB). The performance is further enhanced by
convolutional error correction coding (FEC) and Viterbi soft decision decoding at all data rates from 75 bps to
19200 bps.
1-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
In all modes except Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), STANAG 5065, STANAG 5066, and STANAG 4539,
considerable protection is provided against co-channel interference by adaptive excision filtering which can
automatically remove up to four simultaneous interfering signals. This feature greatly enhances communications
reliability in regions of the world where the HF band is very congested.
The waveform, data rate, and other RF-5710A Modem parameters are selectable from the front panel keys and
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or through the built-in remote control interface. The RF-5710A Modem is
equipped with flexible electrical interfaces that ensure compatibility with a wide range of radio, cryptographic,
and data terminal equipment.
The state-of-the-art RF-5710A Modem hardware is designed to support future interoperable waveforms. It is field
software upgradeable and is IP ready with a built-in Ethernet interface for future networking applications.
The various waveforms supported are described in Paragraph 4.3.4. For a particular application, the choice of
waveform depends upon a number of factors including the type of application, interoperability requirements, the
capabilities of the radio system, and the characteristics of the communications path. Table 1-3 summarizes typical
waveform selections for a number of common applications.
The selection of data rate depends largely upon the expected signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). Higher power
transmitters and higher SNRs are required for the higher data rates. Typical SNR requirements are listed in
Table 1-4.
Table 1-1. RF-5710A Modem Configurations
Product Description Part Number Family Tree
RF-5710A-MD001 Modem that supports: 12004-1000-01 Figure 1-3
MIL-STD-188-110B,
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39-Tone,
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix C High Data Rate
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F ISB
STANAG 5066 Annex G,
STANAG 4539,
STANAG 5065,
STANAG 4529,
STANAG 4481,
STANAG 4415,
STANAG 4285,
and FSK waveforms
RF-5710A-MD002 Modem that supports: 12004-1000-01 Figure 1-3
STANAG 4285,
STANAG 4529,
STANAG 4481,
MIL-STD-188-110B,
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39-Tone,
and FSK waveforms
1-5
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table 1-2. RF-5710A Modem Waveforms

Waveform Mode Data Rates Model Numbers
STANAG 5066, Annex G Coded QAM/PSK 3200, 4800, 6400, 8000 and 9600 bps RF-5710A-MD001 only
Uncoded QAM 12,800 bps
STANAG 4539 Coded QAM/PSK 3200, 4800, 6400, 8000 and 9600 bps RF-5710A-MD001 only
Uncoded QAM 12,800 bps
STANAG 4285 Coded PSK 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200 and 2400 bps All
Uncoded PSK 1200, 2400, and 3600 bps
MIL-STD-188-110B Coded QAM/PSK 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 3200, RF-5710A-MD001 only
4800, 6400, 8000 and 9600 bps
Uncoded QAM/PSK 4800, 12,800 bps
MIL-STD-188-110B Coded QAM/PSK 9600, 12,800, 16,000, and 19,200 bps RF-5710A-MD001 only
Appendix F
MIL-STD-188-110B Coded PSK 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200 and 2400 bps All
(Serial)
Uncoded PSK 4800 bps
MIL-STD-188-110B 39-Tone DPSK 75, 150, 300, 600 and 1200 bps All
Appendix B 39-Tone
STANAG 4529 Coded PSK 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200 and 2400 bps All
Uncoded PSK 600, 1200, 1800 bps
STANAG 4415 Coded PSK 75 bps (NATO Robust Waveform) RF-5710A-MD001 only
STANAG 4481 Coded PSK 300 bps RF-5710A-MD001 only
FSK 75 bps
FSK FSK 50 to 600 bps (variable shift) All
STANAG 5065 MSK (LF) 300 bps RF-5710A-MD001 only
FSK (LF) 75 bps
Table 1-3. Typical Waveform Selections

Application Recommended Waveforms Data Rates
HF E-Mail STANAG 5066, Annex G, STANAG 4539 3200 9600 bps
(long distance) MIL-STD-188-110B/STANAG 4285 75 2400 bps
Ship-Ship STANAG 5066, Annex G, STANAG 4539 3200 9600 bps
Ship-Shore STANAG 5066, Annex G, STANAG 4539 3200 8000 bps
MIL-STD-188-110B/STANAG 4285 75 2400 bps
HF Naval Broadcast STANAG 4285/STANAG 4481 300 600 bps
Digital Video Imagery STANAG 5066, Annex G, STANAG 4539 3200 9600 bps
(Harris HUITS) MIL-STD-188-110B 600 2400 bps
Radar Site Communications STANAG 4285 2400 bps
Disadvantaged HF users, e.g. air-ground, STANAG 4415 75 bps
low-power, or auroral region communications
Legacy communications FSK 75 150 bps
LF/MF Naval Broadcast STANAG 5065 (MSK) 300 bps
1-6
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table 1-4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Requirements

Signal-To-Noise (dB) Ratio Required for 10E-4
Data Rate (bps) Waveform
BER
Sky Wave Channel Surface Wave Channel
(CCIR Poor) (Gaussian)
9600 STANAG 5066, Annex G, 28 20
MIL-STD-188-110B
8000 STANAG 5066, Annex G, 24 17
MIL-STD-188-110B
6400 STANAG 5066, Annex G, 20 14
MIL-STD-188-110B
4800 STANAG 5066, Annex G, 17 12
MIL-STD-188-110B
3200 STANAG 5066, Annex G, 13 8
MIL-STD-188-110B
2400 MIL-STD-188-110B 14 9
1200 MIL-STD-188-110B 9 5
600 MIL-STD-188-110B 5 2
300 MIL-STD-188-110B 3 0
150 MIL-STD-188-110B 0 2
75 MIL-STD-188-110B 3 5
75 (NATO Robust) STANAG 4415 3 8
1.5.1 Configuration Information

Figure 1-3 shows the family tree for the RF-5710A Modem configuration listed in Table 1-1. The family tree
identifies all the major assemblies that make up the RF-5710A Modem configuration.
1.5.1.1 Ancillary Kit
Table 8-3 is the ancillary kit for the RF-5710A Modem.
1.5.1.2 Unit Identification
RF-5710A Modem identification information is located on the front panel identification tags. These tags contain
model, part, and serial number information. See MP7 on Figure 8-1.
1.5.2 General System Relationship
Figure 1-4 shows the general system relationship of the RF-5710A Modem. For more information, refer to the
family tree (Figure 1-3).
1.5.3 Specifications
For RF-5710A Modem specifications, refer to the Appendix at the end of this manual.
1.6 FIRMWARE UPGRADE CAPABILITY
The RF-5710A Modem is provided with a field reprogramming capability. New firmware can be downloaded
from a personal computer through the remote control port when future enhancements become available. The
firmware upgrade capability makes use of industry-standard Xmodem protocols to ensure error-free downloads of
new firmware.
1-7
GENERAL INFORMATION
HF/LF MODEM
RF-5710A
RACK MOUNT RF-5710A CHASSIS

ANCILLARY KIT
KIT ASSEMBLY
12004-0021-01 12004-0100-01 12004-1000-01
A1 A2 A3 A5
HF MODEM PWB POWER SUPPLY AC INPUT FILTER FRONT PANEL ASSY

ASSY ASSY ASSY
12004-2000-01 10447-1050-001 10447-1013-001 12004-1200-01
5710A-004B
Figure 1-3. RF-5710A Modem Family Tree
1-8
GENERAL INFORMATION
DTE RADIO
1 1
DATA
DATA RADIO
A
RF-5710A
1
RADIO
REMOTE REMOTE RADIO
3
TERMINAL B
REMOTE (OPTIONAL)
OPTIONAL
MULTIDROP
CONFIGURATION
REMOTE RADIO
A
DTE RADIO
RF-5710A
2 2
2
DATA DATA RADIO
B
5710A005
Figure 1-4. RF-5710A Modem MD002 General System Relationship
1-9
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.7 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR ASSEMBLIES

1.7.1 General
Table 1-5 lists the major assemblies of the RF-5710A Modem. Figure 7-1 shows the locations of the assemblies.
Table 1-5. Major Assemblies and Reference Designators
Reference Assembly/Subassembly
Function
Designation Name
A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Provides the CPU, DSP, ROM, and RAM clock signals and
I/O interface required to perform all RF-5710A Modem
functions.
A2 Power Supply Assembly Accepts input voltages in the range of 85 Vac 264 Vac,
with an input frequency range of 47 Hz 440 Hz, with no
internal strapping or voltage selection required. Produces DC
output voltages of +5V, 12V, and +12V, which power the
A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly.
A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Prevents unwanted electrical noise from entering the
RF-5710A Modem.
A5 Front Panel Assembly Consists of an LCD module and four pushbutton switches
connected to the A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly by a
flexible ribbon cable. The LCD module displays two rows of
20 characters each. Key presses on the pushbuttons are
detected by the MCP on A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly,
which processes the front panel inputs and sends menu and
status information to the front panel display.
1.8 PARTS LIST OF ITEMS SHIPPED WITH UNIT

Table 1-6 provides the list of parts shipped with the RF-5710A Modem. See Figure 1-3 for the family tree. Refer
to Chapter 8, Table 8-3 and 8-4 for a list of parts included in the Ancillary Kit and Rack Mount Kit.
Table 1-7 provides Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code information for the manufacturers of items
listed in this manual.
Table 1-6. Parts List of Item Shipped With the RF-5710A Modem
Description Part Number
RF-5710A Modem Chassis Assembly 12004-1000-01
Rack Mount Kit 12004-0100-01
Ancillary Kit 12004-0021-01
RF-5710A Manual (PDF)/CD-ROM 10515-0135-4600
1-10
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table 1-7. List of Manufacturers

CAGE Code Manufacturer Name and Address
14304 Harris Corporation
RF Communications Division
1680 University Ave.
Rochester, NY. 14610-1839
55719 Snap-On Tools Corporation
2801 80th Street
Kenosha, WI 53141-1410
89536 Fluke Electronics Corporation
M.S. 216
6920 Seaway Boulevard
PO Box. 9090
Everett, WA 98206-9090
96508 Cooper Industries Inc.
Cooper Tools Division
Luftkin Road
P.O. Box 728
Apex, NC 27502
1.9 LIST OF ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED

Table 1-8 lists the test equipment required for troubleshooting and repairing the RF-5710A Modem. Table 1-9
lists the tools required for removing and replacing RF-5710A Modem assemblies.
Table 1-8. Test Equipment Required, But Not Supplied
CAGE
Code
Digital Multimeter Fluke 87 89536
Table 1-9. Master Required Tools and Materials List

CAGE
Code
Screwdriver, #1 Cross-tip X101 96508
Screwdriver, #2 Cross-tip X102 96508
Nut Driver, 3/16-Inch ND106 55719
Crescent Wrench, Adjustable AD6 55719
Screwdriver, Slotted 1/8 x 3-Inch SDD304 55719
1-11
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-12
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the following:

Site selection refer to Paragraph 2.2
Tools and materials required refer to Paragraph 2.3
Unpacking and repacking refer to Paragraph 2.4
Site installation refer to Paragraph 2.5
Installation checkout refer to Paragraph 2.11
2.2 SITE INFORMATION

2.2.1 General
The information in the following paragraphs provides general guidelines for installing the RF-5710A Modem in a
radio system. Select a ventilated, well-lighted location. Avoid placing the system in a busy or congested area, or
where there is excessive noise. The following are general site considerations:
Availability of power source, earth ground, antenna, etc.
Ease of operation, maintenance, or removal and replacement
Ventilation
Clearance of connection cables to the back of the radio, antenna coupler, etc.
2.2.2 General Guidelines

The information contained in the following paragraphs provides general site guidelines. Before choosing a site,
become familiar with the dimensions shown in Figure 2-1. Make sure there is plenty of room for maintenance
when the unit is installed.
2-1
INSTALLATION
1.688 IN
(4.288 CM)
12.0 IN
(30.48 CM)
8.375 IN
(21.27 CM)
Figure 2-1. RF-5710A Modem Dimensions
2.2.3 Grounding
The following paragraphs contain grounding guidelines that should be followed when performing a vehicular or
base station installation.
2.2.3.1 Base Station Grounding
CAUTION
Do not daisy-chain ground connections, as voltage differentials

develop over long distances. Any artificial ground system must
also be connected to the primary power source ground to prevent
generation of Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and
high-voltage electromagnetic fields around the equipment.
The RF-5710A Modem radio equipment rack ground terminal must be connected to a grounded pipe (such as a
cold water pipe), preferably where the pipe enters the ground, or a steel or copper rod driven six to ten feet into
the soil. In situations where the water table is far below the surface (such as desert or mountainous terrain), it may
be necessary to create an artificial ground system by burying steel or copper plates six to ten inches below the
surface, and connecting them together directly below the RF-5710A Modem radio equipment rack location. In all
cases, such grounds must be connected to the RF-5710A Modem radio equipment rack using at least No. 8 copper
cable directly from the ground point.
2-2
INSTALLATION
2.2.4 Environmental
The RF-5710A Modem will perform in the environment specified in Appendix A, Specifications.
2.3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED
The following tools and test equipment are recommended to install and set up the RF-5710A Modem:
HF radio with a 0 dBm, 600-ohm transmit audio input and a 600-ohm receive audio output with a
nominal output level in the range 40 dBm to +10 dBm
Data source/Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
RS-232 interface breakout box such as the Blackbox #SAM32-55 for troubleshooting interface lines
Voltmeter capable of measuring true Root Mean Square (RMS) such as the Fluke #8060A
Modem to DTE cable
Modem to radio cable
Standard electronic/technician tools

2.4 UNPACKING AND REPACKING
Equipment is packed in corrugated boxes. A two-piece foam enclosure protects the equipment against corrosion
and rough handling. The boxes and packing materials should be retained in case the equipment is reshipped.
2.4.1 Unpacking
Perform the following procedure to unpack the equipment:
a. Inspect the exterior of the box for signs of damage during shipment. Note any problems and report them
to the proper authority. An external sticker on the shipping box provides additional instructions
concerning inspection of the package.
b. Move the boxed equipment into the general location where it is to be installed.
c. After removing the equipment, check the contents against the packing slip to see that the shipment is
complete. Report discrepancies to Harris/RF Communications.
2.4.2 Repacking
Perform the following procedure to repack the receiver-transmitter:
a. Use the original box, if it was retained. If not, use a box that allows three inches of clearance on all sides
of the power amplifier.
b. Use the original packing material, if it was retained. If not, use foam packing material to fill the space
between the receiver-transmitter and the box. Surround the entire unit with three inches of foam packing
material.
c. Use a good quality packing tape (or straps) to seal the box after closing.
2.5 SITE INSTALLATION
The following paragraphs describe the power requirements and ancillary items kit required for properly installing
the RF-5710A Modem. Cabling, jumper and DIP switch settings, unit removal and installation procedures,
clearance and ventilation requirements, and mounting information are also included.
2-3
INSTALLATION
2.5.1 Power Requirements

The RF-5710A Modem uses less than 15 watts of power. The RF-5710A Modem will automatically accept any
primary power voltage and frequency in the specified ranges:
85 Vac 264 Vac
47 Hz 440 Hz
WARNING
Do not energize the equipment unless the chassis and all exposed
metal parts are properly grounded.
2.5.2 Ancillary Items Kit
The RF-5710A Modem is supplied with an ancillary items kit that contains items required for proper installation.
For more information regarding the contents of this kit, refer to Table 8-3.
2.5.3 Installation and Interconnect Diagrams
See Figure 1-4 for the typical RF-5710A Modem configuration. See Figure 6-2 for the RF-5710A Modem
interconnect schematic diagram.
2.5.4 Jumper/DIP Switch Settings
There are no jumper or DIP switch setting in the RF-5710A Modem.
2.5.5 Rack Mount Installation
See Figure 2-1 for dimensions of the RF-5710A Modem. The RF-5710A Modem can be mounted by itself. If the
installation calls for two modems to be mounted in the same row, use the optional Heavy Duty Rack Mount Kit
(RF-5710A-RM001).
2.5.5.1 Modem Rack Mount Using Standard Rack Mount Kit
See Figure 2-2 and perform the following procedure to install one RF-5710A Modem in one rack space:
a. Determine whether the RF-5710A Modem should be on the left or right side of the single rack space.
NOTE
All brackets are fully reversible.
b. Install the pseudo modem on the appropriate side of the RF-5710A Modem using the two (2) caphead
screws provided.
c. Install the side bracket on the opposite side of the RF-5710A Modem using the two (2) caphead screws
provided.
d. Install the remaining side bracket on the other side of the pseudo modem using the two (2) caphead
screws provided.
e. Slide the assembly carefully into the rack and secure the front panel to the rack with the front panel
screws provided. Secure the rear of the side brackets using the hardware provided.
2-4
INSTALLATION
SIDE BRACKET
(12004-0115-01)
(2 PLACES)
PSEUDO MODEM
(12004-0105-01)
SCREW
RF-5710A MODEM (12004-0245-01)
(6 PLACES)
5710C-001
Figure 2-2. RF-5710A Modem Rack Mount Installation
2.5.5.2 Single Modem Rack Mount Using Heavy Duty Rack Mount Kit
See Figure 2-3 and perform the following procedure to install one RF-5710A Modem in one rack space:
a. Determine whether the RF-5710A Modem should be on the left or right side of the single rack space.
b. Slide the RF-5710A Modem into the appropriate slot.
c. Attach the modem to the rack mount via mounting holes located on the front of the mount.
d. Align the rear of the modem with the alignment pin located on the heavy duty rack mount kit before
tightening screws down.
e. Attach all wires over the wire support brace at the rear of the mount.
f. Slide the assembly carefully into the rack and secure the front panel to the rack with the front panel
screws provided.
2-5
INSTALLATION
2.5.5.3 Dual Modem Rack Mount Using Heavy Duty Rack Mount Kit
See Figure 2-3 and perform the following procedure to install two modems side by side in the Heavy Duty Rack
Mount Kit.
a. Slide the RF-5710A Modem into the available slot.
b. Attach the modem to the rack mount via mounting holes located on the front of the mount.
c. Align the rear of the modem with the alignment pin located on the heavy duty rack mount kit before
tightening screws down.
d. Attach all wires over the wire support brace at the rear of the mount.
e. Slide the assembly carefully into the rack and secure the front panel to the rack with the front panel
screws provided.
5710800
Figure 2-3. RF-5710A Modem Heavy Duty Rack Mount Installation
2-6
INSTALLATION
2.6 RF-5710A MODEM REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

All connectors are located on the rear panel of the RF-5710A Modem. Table 2-1 identifies the connectors and
Figure 2-4 shows their location.
Table 2-1. HF Data Modem Rear Panel Connectors
Connector Function Type
J1 Ethernet Interface Ethernet (BNC)
J2 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) 25 Pin D, Female
J3 Remote Control 25 Pin D, Male
J4 Radio A (Primary) 9 Pin D, Male
J5 Radio B (Secondary) 9 Pin D, Female
J6 Line Power (85 250 Vac) 3 Pin EIA
5710A2000
Figure 2-4. Locations of Rear Panel Connectors
2.6.1 Ethernet Connector J1

The Ethernet connector J1 is provided for future networking applications. It will be enabled through future
software upgrades.
2.6.2 DTE Connector J2
The DTE connector J2 is used to connect the RF-5710A Modem to the DTE or cryptographic equipment.
The electrical characteristics of the data interface can be selected from the front panel controls or through the
remote control interface. The following selections are available:
RS-232D unbalanced
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
MIL-STD-188-114 unbalanced
2-7
INSTALLATION
In the unbalanced modes of operation (RS-232D/RS-423/MIL-STD-188-114), the signals associated with the pins
on DTE connector J2 are listed in Table 2-2.
In the balanced mode of operation (RS-422), the signals associated with the pins on DTE connector J2 are listed
in Table 2-3.
A mating 25-pin D connector is provided in the ancillary kit for use in fabricating an interface cable. The use of
shielded cable is strongly recommended to minimize Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) from external sources.
Table 2-2. DTE Connector J2 Pin Numbers and Signals for Unbalanced
RS-232D/RS-423/MIL-STD-188-114 Interfaces
DTE Connector (Unbalanced)
Pin Signal Description

1 Chassis Ground
2 Transmit Data (TXD)
3 Receive Data (RXD)
4 Request-to-Send (RTS)
5 Clear-to-Send (CTS)
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)
7 Signal Ground
8 Carrier Detect (CD)
15 Transmit Clock (TX Clock)
17 Receive Clock (RX Clock)
24 External Transmit Clock Input (EXT TX CLOCK)
2-8
INSTALLATION
Table 2-3. DTE Connector J2 Pin Numbers and Signals for Balanced RS-422 Interfaces
DTE Connector (Balanced)
Pin Signal Description Comments

1 Chassis Ground
2 +Transmit Data (TXD+)
3 +Receive Data (RXD+)
4 +Request-to-Send (RTS+)
5 +Clear-to-Send (CTS+)
6 +Data Set Ready (DSR+)
7 Signal Ground
8 +Carrier Detect (CD+)
9 Receive Clock (RXC) Forms balanced pair with signal RXC+ (pin 17)
10 Carrier Detect (CD) Forms balanced pair with signal CD+ (pin 8)
11 N/C
12 Transmit Clock (TXC) Forms balanced pair with signal TXC+ (pin 15)
13 Clear-to-Send (CTS) Forms balanced pair with signal CTS+ (pin 5)
14 Transmit Data (TXD) Forms balanced pair with signal TXD+ (pin 2)
15 +Transmit Clock (TXC+)
16 Receive Data (RXD) Forms balanced pair with signal RXD+ (pin 3)
17 +Receive Clock (RXC+)
18 N/C
19 Request-to-Send (RTS) Forms balanced pair with signal RTS+ (pin 4)
20 N/C
21 N/C
22 Data Set Ready (DSR) Forms balanced pair with signal DSR+ (pin 6)
23 N/C
24 +External Transmit Clock In-
put (EXT TX CLOCK+)
25 External Transmit Clock In- Forms balanced pair with signal EXT TXC (pin 24)
put (EXT TX CLOCK)
2.6.3 Remote Connector J3

The Remote connector J3 is used to connect the RF-5710A Modem to a remote control terminal or computer.
The electrical characteristics of the remote interface can only be selected from the front panel controls. The
following settings are available:
RS-232D unbalanced
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
RS-485 balanced
2-9
INSTALLATION
In addition, the remote interface can be configured for point-to-point or multidrop operation. In the multidrop
mode, the control computer can address multiple RF-5710A Modems connected to the same remote control bus.
The RF-5710A Modem can be set to point-to-point or multidrop mode for any of the electrical interface
standards. The remote control protocol is described in detail in Chapter 3.
The signals associated with the pins on remote connector J3 are listed in Table 2-4.
A mating 25-pin D connector is provided in the ancillary kit for use in fabricating an interface cable. The use of
shielded cable is strongly recommended to minimize RFI from external sources.
Table 2-4. Remote Connector J3 Pin Numbers and Signals
Remote Connector
Pin Signal Description Usage

1 Chassis Ground
2 +Transmit Data (TXD+) RS-232D, RS-422, RS-423, RS-485
3 +Receive Data (RXD+) RS-232D, RS-422, RS-423
7 Signal Ground
14 Transmit Data (TXD) RS-422, RS-485 Forms balanced pair with signal
TXD+ (pin 3)
16 Receive Data (RXD) RS-422 Forms balanced pair with signal RXD+ (pin 3)
2.6.4 Radio Connectors J4 & J5

The RF-5710A Modem is provided with two radio interface ports; a Primary Radio Connector J4 which is
normally used to connect the radio and a Secondary Radio Connector J5 which is intended to support future
RF-5710A Modem capabilities that include diversity reception and Independent Sideband (ISB) transmission.
The Secondary Radio Connector J5 will be enabled through future software upgrades.
Each radio port is designed to work with a 600-ohm balanced load, (input or output). The transmit output level
can be adjusted from 40 dBm to +10 dBm through the use of the front panel controls or the remote control port.
The receive audio input does not require adjustment and can accommodate signals in the range 35 dBm to +10
dBm.
The Primary Radio Connector J4 also provides two keyline signals to cause the radio to switch from receive to
transmit. One keyline is an open collector transistor driver and the other is an isolated bi-directional contact
closure. The appropriate keyline for the radio should be used. The keylines are enabled as a result of the
RF-5710A Modem receiving an RTS signal from the DTE.
The signals associated with the pins on the Primary Radio Connector J4 are listed in Table 2-5 and the signals
associated with the Secondary Radio Connector J5 are listed in Table 2-6.
Mating connectors are provided in the ancillary kit for use in fabricating an interface cable. The use of shielded
cable is strongly recommended to minimize RFI from external sources.
2-10
INSTALLATION
Table 2-5. Primary Radio Connector J4 Pin Numbers and Signals

Primary Radio Connector

1 Receive Audio +
2 Receive Audio
3 Secondary Keyline A (contact closure)
4 Transmit Audio +
5 Transmit Audio
6 Secondary Keyline B (contact closure)
7 Reserved
8 Keyline (Open collector to ground)
9 Keyline Return/Ground
Table 2-6. Secondary Radio Connector J5 Pin Numbers and Signals

Secondary Radio Connector

1 Receive Audio +
2 Receive Audio
3 Secondary Keyline A (contact closure)
4 Transmit Audio +
5 Transmit Audio
6 Secondary Keyline B (contact closure)
7 Reserved
8 Keyline (Open collector to ground)
9 Reserved
2.6.5 AC Power Connector J6

The AC power input connector J6 is used to supply the RF-5710A Modem with its primary power. The AC power
cable is a standard three-prong detachable power supply cord, and is included in the ancillary kit. A cable clamp
is also included in the ancillary kit, and should be placed around the AC power cord, approximately four inches
from the plug connector. This clamp should be secured to the grounding lug on the rear panel of the RF-5710A
Modem chassis in order to provide strain relief.
NOTE
For maximum shielding effectiveness, connect an appropriately
grounded system grounding strap (in addition to the AC power
cord cable clamp) to the ground lug on the rear panel of the
RF-5710A Modem chassis. The strap must be placed between
the RF-5710A Modem chassis and the cable clamp.
2-11
INSTALLATION
2.7 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE RADIO

A mating 9-pin D connector is provided in the ancillary kit to assist users in making a modem-to-radio cable. The
RF-5710A Modem has a transformer coupled audio interface with both open collector to ground and contact
closure keyline circuits. Refer to Paragraph 2.6.4 for details of the pin connections on the Primary Radio
Connector J4.
Figure 2-5 shows an example of the cable connections for a balanced audio interface; Figure 2-6 shows an
unbalanced interface. The use of shielded cable is strongly recommended to minimize RFI from external sources.
Set the transmit level to the output required by the radio (typically 0 dBm or 2.2 volts peak-to-peak across
600 ohms). Refer to the Operation Section of this manual to set the nominal transmit level between +10 dBm and
40 dBm (into 600 ohms).
Some radios may require a delay between the assertion of the keyline signal and the start of the transmit audio
from the RF-5710A Modem. This delay may be required to allow a transmit circuit to power up or an antenna
coupler to tune. Refer to the Operation Section of this manual to set the Keyline Delay between 0.1 and
19.9 seconds.
RADIO
RF-5710A PRIMARY CONNECTOR HF-SSB RADIO
MODEM RADIO (J4) (See owners
manual)
RX AUDIO+ 1 RX AUDIO+
RX AUDIO 2 RX AUDIO
TX AUDIO+ 4 TX AUDIO+
TX AUDIO 5 TX AUDIO
KEYLINE 8 KEYLINE
RETURN (GND) 9 RETURN (GND)
Figure 2-5. Primary Radio Interface Cable (Balanced Audio)
2-12
INSTALLATION
RADIO
RF-5710A PRIMARY CONNECTOR HF-SSB RADIO
MODEM RADIO (J4) (See owners
manual)
RX AUDIO+ 1 RX AUDIO
RX AUDIO 2
TX AUDIO+ 4 TX AUDIO
TX AUDIO 5
KEYLINE 8 KEYLINE
RETURN (GND) 9 RETURN (GND)
Figure 2-6. Primary Radio Interface Cable (Unbalanced Audio)
2.8 CONNECTING THE RF-5710A MODEM TO THE DTE
A mating 25-pin D connector is provided in the ancillary kit to make a modem-to-DTE cable. The DTE interface
can be set to a number of different electrical interface standards, including RS-232D, RS-422 balanced, RS-423
unbalanced, and MIL-STD-188-114 unbalanced. The cable connections between the RF-5710A Modem and DTE
depend upon a number of factors, including the electrical interface selected, synchronous or asynchronous
operation, and the type of transmit clock (synchronous mode only; input or output clock). Refer to Paragraph
2.6.2 for details of the pin connections on the DTE connector J2.
Figure 2-7 shows an example of the cable connections for a RS-232D/RS-423/MIL-STD-188-114 synchronous
interface with the RF-5710A Modem providing both receive and transmit clocks to the DTE. Figure 2-8 shows
the cable connections for an RS-422 balanced synchronous interface with the RF-5710A Modem providing the
receive clock, but accepting an external transmit clock from the DTE. Cable connections for asynchronous
interfaces are similar, but they do not require the lines for the receive and transmit clock signals. The use of
shielded cable is strongly recommended to minimize RFI from external sources.
NOTE
If the RF-5710A Modem is programmed for External Transmit

Clock, the DTE must continuously provide the clock signal on
pin 24 of DTE connector J2. Failure to do this will result in a
RF-5710A Modem fault after the RTS signal is activated.
2-13
INSTALLATION
RF-5710A 25-PIN D DTE

MODEM CONNECTOR
SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD
RXD 3 3 RXD
TXD 2 2 TXD
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
DCD 8 8 RLSD
DTR 20 20 DTR
SIGNAL GND 7 7 SIGNAL GND
RXC 17 17 RXC
TXC 15 15 TXC
Figure 2-7. Synchronous DTE Interface Cable (RS-232D/RS-423/MIL-STD-188-114 Unbalanced)
2-14
INSTALLATION
RF-5710A 25-PIN D DTE

MODEM CONNECTOR
SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD
RXD+ 3 3 RXD+
RXD 16 16 RXD
TXD+ 2 2 TXD+
TXD 14 14 TXD
RTS+ 4 4 RTS+
RTS 19 19 RTS
CTS+ 5 5 CTS+
CTS 13 13 CTS
DSR+ 6 6 DSR+
DSR 22 22 DSR
DCD+ 8 8 DCD+
DCD 10 10 DCD
DTR+
DTR
SIGNAL GND 7 7 SIGNAL GND
RXC+ 17 17 RXC+
RXC 9 9 RXC
TXC+ 15 15 TXC+
TXC 12 12 TXC
TXCI+ 24
TXCI 25
Figure 2-8. Synchronous DTE Interface Cable (RS-422 Balanced)
2-15
INSTALLATION
2.9 SETTING MODEM OPERATING PARAMETERS

The RF-5710A Modem has a wide range of programming options. The setting of its operating parameters must be
compatible with other modems in the network and the DTE that it is connected to.
2.9.1 Programming Modem Waveform Parameters
Table 2-7 lists the RF-5710A Modem configuration as shipped. This configuration can also be restored using the
front panel RESET command as described in the operation section of this manual. Refer to the operation section
of this manual for further details on selecting different waveform operating modes and associated parameters.
Table 2-7. Default Parameters
Parameter RF-5710A-MD001 RF-5710A-MD002
REMOTE/LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL
Waveform MIL-STD-188-110B SERIAL
Data Rate (bps) 9600 2400
Interleaving LONG (L) LONG (L)
Duplex Full Full
Acq. on Data Off Off
Data Port Synchronous Synchronous
Polarity Normal Normal
Tx Clock Internal Internal
Display Backlight On On
Display Contrast Level 5 5
Audio Tx Level 0 dBm 0 dBm
Tx Audio Delay + 00.1 S + 00.0 S
Keyline RTS keys xmtr RTS keys xmtr
Activity Detector Off Off
2.9.2 Asynchronous DTE

Program the RF-5710A Modem DATA PORT parameters to match the DTE settings. Refer to the Operation
Section of this manual. The following parameters must be set for an asynchronous DTE:
Polarity (Normal, Invert) use Normal for RS-232 interoperability
DTE Data Rate 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300, 150, 75 bps (50 bps available for Frequency
Shift Keying [FSK])
Stop Bits 1 or 2
Parity Odd, Even, None
Character Length 5, 6, 7, 8 bits per character
Flow Control CTS or XON/XOFF
2-16
INSTALLATION
2.9.3 Synchronous DTE

Program the RF-5710A Modem DATA PORT parameters to match the DTE settings. Refer to the Operation
Section of this manual. The following parameters must be set for a synchronous DTE:
Polarity (Normal, Invert) use Normal for RS-232 interoperability and Invert for MIL-STD-188
compatibility
Tx Clock Internal, External, or Recovered from the Transmit Data
For synchronous DTE, the source of the transmit clock must be set as follows:
TX Clock: EXT for an external clock provided by a DTE to J2 pin 24
TX Clock: INT for modem providing TX clock on J2 pin 15
TX Clock: DATA for clock to be recovered from the incoming transmit data stream
NOTE
In synchronous operation, the DTE data rate must match the
transmit and receive channel rates of the current operating
waveform.
2.10 SENDING DATA
Data is sent by activating the RF-5710A Modem input, which may be controllable from the DTE. If the
RF-5710A Modem fails to transmit the complete message, verify activity on the following signal lines:
RTS
CTS
TX DATA
TX CLK
RX CLK
2.11 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT

Installation checkout has three phases. Phase 1 is a pre-energizing check to make sure that the unit is installed
correctly, and that all support items are nearby. Phase 2 covers the units power up and preliminary tests. Phase 3
tests all the functions of the RF-5710A Modem.
2-17
INSTALLATION
2.11.1 Phase 1 Installation Inspection and Pre-Power Up Procedures

When the RF-5710A Modem is installed and all connector cables attached, verify that the following items are
completed:
All associated hardware is secure.
Check that system units are connected to ground, preferably at a single point.
Check securing hardware to be sure the equipment cannot be tipped over or moved.
Check that area cooling is adequate for removing heat that may develop during equipment operation.
Verify that the power source is of adequate capability and adequately protected for the radio systems
load, and that installation of the power cable is correct.
Check any companion equipment, such as the power supply, or remote control, for operational readiness.
2.11.2 Phase 2 Initial Turn-On and Preliminary Tests

To turn the unit on, refer to Paragraph 6.2.3. Special preliminary tests are not necessary.
2.11.3 Phase 3 Installation Verification Test
To verify RF-5710A Modem performance, run Built-In Test (BIT). Refer to Paragraph 6.2.3.
2-18
OPERATION
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter discusses the operational capabilities and limitations of the RF-5710A Modem and provides
instruction on how to perform those operations.
The RF-5710A Modem has been designed for simplicity and ease of use. The RF-5710A Modem operating
parameters can be selected in two ways:
Use the FIELD, SCROLL, and ENTER buttons to select the operating parameters.
Use an ASCII remote control terminal or remote control computer as described in Paragraph 3.11.
The FIELD, SCROLL, and ENTER keys are located on the front panel together with a Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) display that shows the RF-5710A Modem status and setup information. The front panel is shown in
Figure 3-1.
3.2 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS
Figure 3-1 shows the RF-5710A Modem controls, indicators, and connectors. Table 3-1 describes the controls,
indicators, and connectors.
SCROLL MENU FIELD
POWER SWITCH LCD BUTTONS BUTTON
J1 J2 DTE J4 RADIO A ENTER

ETHERNET CONNECTOR CONNECTOR BUTTON
CONNECTOR
GROUND
J3 REMOTE J5 RADIO B J6 AC INPUT

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
5710A-002A
Figure 3-1. RF-5710A Modem Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
3-1
OPERATION
Table 3-1. RF-5710A Modem Controls, Indicators, and Connectors

Control/Indicator/Connector Function
POWER Switch Turns power to the RF-5710A Modem ON or
OFF.
SCROLL MENU Buttons Scrolls through operating parameters.
FIELD Button Scroll to select field.
ENTER Button Push to select operating parameter.
LCD Shows RF-5710A Modem status and setup
information.
J1 Ethernet Connector Ethernet interface provided for future
networking applications.
J2 DTE Connector Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) connector
used to connect the RF-5710A Modem to the
DTE or cryptographic equipment.
J4 Radio A Connector Normally used to connect the radio and a
Secondary Radio Connector (J5). Also
provides two keyline signals to allow the radio
to switch from receive to transmit.
J6 AC Input Connector AC power input connector used to supply the
RF-5710A Modem with its primary power.
J5 Radio B Connector Radio connector intended to support future
RF-5710A Modem capabilities that include
diversity reception and Independent Sideband
(ISB) transmission.
J3 Remote Connector Remote connector used to connect the
RF-5710A Modem to a remote control termi-
nal or computer.
3.3 MODEM POWER UP

The following paragraphs describes the initial start-up procedure for the RF-5710A Modem. Ensure that all
necessary cables are connected as described in this manual.
Perform the following procedure to power up the RF-5710A Modem:
a. Turn the power switch to the ON position. *INITIALIZING* BITE IN PROGRESS will appear in the
display. This indicates that the RF-5710A Modem is conducting a self-test with the Built-in Test
Equipment (BITE) program.
b. After several seconds, the display will show the current waveform operating parameters.
c. If these steps do not successfully occur in order, or if a failure is indicated during the BITE test, refer to
Paragraph 6.2 for RF-5710A Modem troubleshooting.
3-2
OPERATION
3.4 RF-5710A MODEM SELF-TEST

Perform the following procedure for an RF-5710A Modem self-test:
a. Push the FIELD button once. The keyword for the last field used will begin flashing. Push the FIELD
button until the waveform type is flashing in the upper left corner of the display.
b. Push one of the SCROLL buttons. Continue pushing the button until the word TEST appears in the
flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem self-test is the default choice and the word MODEM
will be flashing in the display.
d. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem will briefly display WAIT FOR SELF TEST
RESULTS, then return to the RF-5710A Modem self-test screen.
e. After about ten seconds, if self-test is successful, the message MODEM SELF TEST PASSED will
display briefly. The RF-5710A Modem will then return to the modem self-test screen. If the self-test is
not successful, a fault message will display. Refer to Paragraph 6.2 for RF-5710A Modem
troubleshooting.
3.5 OPERATIONAL MODES
See Figure 3-2. To select a mode, push the FIELD button until the top left hand text in the LCD display is
blinking (the blinking text should be one of the Modes shown in Table 3-2). Push the SCROLL button to change
settings. Pushing ENTER will enter the setting and mode. Paragraphs 3.5.1 through 3.5.12 describe RF-5710A
Modem operational modes.
The operational modes of the RF-5710A Modem are shown in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. RF-5710A Operational Modes
Mode Waveform(s)
5066G STANAG 5066 Annex G
5065 STANAG 5065
4539 STANAG 4539 Annex B Section 4
(which is MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix C)
4529 STANAG 4529
4481 STANAG 4481
4415 STANAG 4415
4285 STANAG 4285
110BF MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F
(9600 19200 bps coded)
110B MIL-STD-188-110A
(1502400 bps coded and 4800 uncoded)
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix C
(3200 9600 bps coded, 12800 bps uncoded)
STANAG 4415 75 bps
SERIAL MIL-STD-188-110B
39TONE MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B
FSK FSK
SETUP OPTIONS N/A
PRESET N/A
RESET N/A
VERSIONSMD001 (or 002) N/A
TEST N/A
3-3
OPERATION
FIELD
Tx 2400L LOCAL
SERIAL
Rx Idle Pre:000
SCROLL
110B
ENTER
110B Tx 9600 L LOCAL
Rx Idle Pre:000
ENTER

DONE
Rx Idle Pre:000
5710B-600
Figure 3-2. Changing RF-5710A Operational Modes and Settings
3-4
OPERATION
3.5.1 SERIAL Tone (MIL-STD-188-110B) Mode Operation

The following paragraphs describe operation of the RF-5710A Modem in the SERIAL tone
(MIL-STD-188-110B) waveform mode.
3.5.1.1 Serial Tone Front Panel Display
See Figure 3-3 for layout and description of the RF-5710A Modem front panel display during operation in the
SERIAL tone mode.
3.5.1.2 Serial Tone Operation
See Figure 3-4 for the operation flowchart of the RF-5710A Modem in the SERIAL tone mode. Perform the
following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during SERIAL tone operation:
a. Push the FIELD button until the keyword in the upper left hand corner begins to flash.
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword SERIAL appears in the flashing display.
c. Push the FIELD button to select the SERIAL tone mode and move the cursor to the Transmit Data
Rate field. The field to the right of the word Tx will begin to flash.
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired data rate.
e. Perform the following procedure if operating at less than 4800 bps:
1. Push the FIELD button to enter the displayed data rate and move the cursor to the Interleaving field.
2. Push the SCROLL button to select Interleaving: Long (L), Short (S), or Zero (Z).
NOTE
Long interleaving will generally provide the lowest bit error rate
but it causes a longer throughput delay (9.6 seconds). Short and
zero interleaving have shorter throughput delays (1.2 and 0.6
seconds respectively), but are more susceptible to transmission
errors.
f. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for SERIAL tone mode operation.
3-5
OPERATION
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during SERIAL tone mode operation:
a. Push the FIELD button until the appropriate parameter keyword is flashing.
b. Push the SCROLL buttons to highlight the new setting (see Figure 3-4).
c. Push ENTER to enter the new setting.
3.5.1.3 Transmit Keyline Indications
The presence of the word KEY on the front panel display indicates that the output of the transmitter keyline
circuits have been activated by the RF-5710A Modem (see Figure 3-3). In half-duplex operation, the RF-5710A
Modem utilizes transmit priority. The RF-5710A Modem cannot receive while it is transmitting, and a
transmission will interrupt a receive operation.
3.5.1.4 Receive Signal Indications
The following receive signal indications are provided:
a. When there is no incoming receive signal (RX), the Rx display will show the word: Idle. There will be
no indication in the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) field.
b. When a MIL-STD-188-110B serial tone signal is being received, the RF-5710A Modem automatically
adjusts the data rate to the incoming signal. The Rx field of the front panel display will show the detected
incoming data rate (bps) and interleaving setting: Long (L), Short (S), or Zero (Z). The front panel of the
RF-5710A Modem will also show the SNR in dB in the lower left portion of the display, to the left of the
label Rx. For data rates 150 bps 4800 bps, the maximum SNR displayed is 23. For 75 bps, the
maximum SNR displayed varies from 7 to 8.
NOTE
The MIL-STD-188-110B waveform provided only 1 bit in the
preamble for interleaver specification. Therefore, the choice of
Zero, Short, and Long was not possible. The Standard provided a
solution which required coordination between transmit and
receive site. This coordination is accomplished as follows:
1.) For both sites to receive short and long interleaver,
both modems TX parameters must be set to short or
long.
2.) For both sites to receive zero interleaver, both
modems TX parameters must be set to zero.
3-6
OPERATION
Transmit Data Rate (bps)

Uncoded Coded
Interleaving
4800 2400 (Coded Mode)
1200
600 LONG (L)
300 SHORT (S)
150 ZERO (Z)
75
Local/Remote
MIL-STD-188-110B Indication
SERIAL TONE
Transmit Keyline LOCAL

Indicator SERIAL Tx 2400L
Presence of word KEY KEY 23 Rx 1200 S Pre:000 Preset Number
indicates that output Asterisk added
of transmitter keyline
circuits are active. if not stored
or has been modified
Signal to Noise Ratio Receive Data Rate (bps)

SNR of incoming signal. Automatically adjusts to incoming signal.
Max. value displayed: 23 dB When no signal is received, the display will show:
Blank display indicates no Rx signal. Rx Idle
5710-301B
Figure 3-3. SERIAL Tone Mode Front Panel Display
3-7
OPERATION
SERIAL Tx 2400 L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
FIELD

Rx Idle Pre:00
FIELD
4800 U
2400
SERIAL Tx 2400 L LOCAL 1200
Rx Idle Pre:00 600
SCROLL 300 FIELD
150
FIELD
75
Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL F DONE
FIELD ENTER
5710-302C

Rx Idle Pre:00
F
ENTER
NOTE
Pushing the enter button at any time will enter the displayed
parameter choices and they will become the current waveform
operating parameters.
Figure 3-4. Serial Tone Mode Operation Flowchart
3-8
OPERATION
3.5.2 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)

The following paragraphs describe operation of the RF-5710A Modem in the MIL-STD-188-110B mode.
3.5.2.1 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Front Panel Display
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F mode.
Transmit & Receive Interleaving

Data Rate (bps) (Coded Mode)
MIL-STD-188-110B Coded VERY LONG (VL)
Appendix F LONG (L)
19200 MEDIUM (M)
16000
12800 SHORT (S)
9600 VERY SHORT (VS)
ULTRA SHORT (US)
Transmit Keyline
Indicator
Presence of word KEY Local/Remote
indicates that output 110BF 9600L LOCAL Indication
circuits are active. KEY 63 Rx 63 Pre:000
Preset Number
Asterisk added
if not stored
Signal to Noise Ratio
Receive Data Rate (bps) Blank display indicate an
SNR of incoming signal
Rx signal present
Max. value displayed: 63 dB Automatically adjusts to incoming signal.
Left side (USB) indicates channel A When no signal is received, the display will show:
Right side (LSB) indicates channel B
Blank display indicates no Rx signal. Rx Idle 5710B-601
Figure 3-5. MIL-STD-188-110B Mode
3.5.2.2 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)

See Figure 3-6 for the operation flowchart of the RF-5710A Modem in the MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F
mode. Perform the following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during 110B mode operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword 110B appears in the flashing display.
d. Push the FIELD button to select the desired mode and move the cursor to the Transmit Data Rate
field. The keyword 9600 will begin to flash.
e. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired data rate.
f. Push the FIELD button to enter the displayed data rate and move the cursor to the interleaving field.
g. Push the SCROLL button to select Interleaving: Ultra Short (US), Very Short (VS), Short (S), Medium
(M), Long (L), Very Long (VL).
3-9
OPERATION
NOTE
Very Long Interleaving will generally provide the lowest bit
error rate but it causes the longest throughput delay (17.28
seconds). Ultra Short interleaving has a shorter throughput delay
(0.5 seconds) but is more susceptible to transmission errors.
h. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for the MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during the MIL-STD-188-110B
Appendix F mode operation:
b. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the new setting (see Figure 3-7).
circuits have been activated by the RF-5710A Modem (see Figure 3-13).
a. During full-duplex operation of the RF-5710A Modem, when there is no incoming receive signal, the Rx
display will show the word: Idle. There will be no indication in the SNR field.
b. When a MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F mode signal is being received, the RF-5710A Modem
automatically adjusts the data rate to the incoming signal. The Rx field of the front panel display will
show the detected incoming data rate (bps) and interleaving setting: Ultra Short (US), Very Short (VS),
Short (S), Medium (M), Long (L), and Very Long (VL). The front panel of the RF-5710A Modem will
also show the SNR in dB in the lower left and right portion of the display, to the left and right of the label
Rx. The maximum SNR is 63 dB.
3-10
OPERATION
SERIAL Tx 2400L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:000
SCROLL
SCROLL
110BF
ENTER
110BF Tx 9600 L LOCAL

19200
Rx Idle Pre:000
16000
SCROLL 12800
FIELD
FIELD
9600
110BF Tx 9600 L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:000
VL
L
SCROLL M
F
DONE
FIELD ENTER
S
LOCAL VS
110BF Tx 9600L
US
Rx Idle Pre:000
5710B-602
Figure 3-6. MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F Mode Flowchart
3-11
OPERATION
3.5.3 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)

3.5.3.1 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Front Panel Display
MIL-STD-188-110B Mode.
Transmit & Receive

Data Rate (bps) Interleaving
Coded Uncoded (Coded Mode)
9600 12,800
MIL-STD-188-110B 8000 4,800
VERY LONG (VL)
6400 LONG (L)
4800 MEDIUM (M)
3200 SHORT (S)
1200 ULTRA SHORT (US)
600 ZERO (Z)
Transmit Keyline 150
75
Indicator
indicates that output 110B 9600L LOCAL Indication
circuits are active. KEY 63 Rx Pre:000
Preset Number
Asterisk added
SNR of incoming signal. Receive Data Rate (bps) if not stored
Max. value displayed: 63 dB or has been modified
Automatically adjusts to incoming signal.
Blank display indicates no Rx signal.
When no signal is received, the display will show:
Rx Idle 5710B-603
Figure 3-7. MIL-STD-188-110B Mode
3.5.3.2 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)

The 110B mode of operation consists of three waveforms, MIL-STD-188-110B, MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix C
and STANAG 4415 (4415 is the same waveform as 75 bps MIL-STD-188-110B with a tougher receive
performance requirement). Because the 110B mode consists of three waveforms, the interleaver selection depends
on the data rate, see Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. Waveform Data Rates
Waveform Coded Uncoded Interleavers Sizes
MIL-STD-188-110B 2400, 1200, 600, 300, 4800 bps Z, S, L
150
MIL-STD-188-110B 9600, 8000, 6400, 12800 bps US, VS, S, M, L, VL
Appendix C 4800, 3200
STANAG 4415 75 NA Z, S, L
3-12
OPERATION
See Figure 3-8 for the operation flowchart of the RF-5710A Modem in the MIL-STD-188-110B mode. Perform
the following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during 110B mode operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword 110B appears in the flashing display.
g. Push the SCROLL button to select Interleaving: Zero (Z), Ultra Short (US), Very Short (VS), Short (S),
Medium (M), Long (L), Very Long (VL).
NOTE
Very long interleaving will generally provide the lowest bit error
rate but it causes the longest throughput delay (17.28 seconds).
Ultra short interleaving has a shorter throughput delay (0.5
seconds), but is more susceptible to transmission errors.
h. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for the MIL-STD-188-110B Mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during the MIL-STD-188-110B Mode
operation:
b. When a MIL-STD-188-110B Mode signal is being received, the RF-5710A Modem automatically adjusts
the data rate to the incoming signal. The Rx field of the front panel display will show the detected
incoming data rate (bps) and interleaving setting: Ultra Short (US), Very Short (VS), Short (S), Medium
(M), Long (L), and Very Long (VL). The front panel of the RF-5710A Modem will also show the SNR in
dB in the lower left portion of the display, to the left of the label Rx. The maximum SNR is 63 dB.
3-13
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:000
SCROLL
SCROLL
12,800 U
9600
110B 8000
6400
4,800 U
F
4800
ENTER
3200
2400
1200
Rx Idle Pre:000
600
SCROLL 300
FIELD
150
FIELD
75
Rx Idle Pre:000
VL
L
SCROLL
F
DONE
FIELD
M ENTER
S
110B Tx 9600L LOCAL VS
Rx Idle Pre:000 US
Z
5710B-604
Figure 3-8. MIL-STD-188-110B Mode Flowchart
3-14
OPERATION
3.5.4 39TONE Mode Operation

The following paragraphs describe operation of the RF-5710A Modem in the 39TONE waveform mode.
3.5.4.1 39TONE Front Panel Display
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39TONE mode.
Interleaving
(Coded Mode)
Transmit & Receive LONG (L)

SHORT (S)
MIL-STD 188-110B Data Rate (bps) ALTERNATE LONG (AL) Coded
APPENDIX B ALTERNATE SHORT (AS) 2400
1200
600
300
Transmit Keyline 150
Indicator 39TONE 1200L LOCAL 75
KEY 40 Rx Pre:000
indicates that output Indication
circuits are active.
Preset Number
Asterisk added
Signal to Noise Ratio if not stored
SNR of incoming signal.
Max. value displayed: 40 dB Receive Data Rate (bps)
Automatically locked at same Data Rate and
Interleaving value as Tx.
Rx Idle 5710-605
Figure 3-9. 39TONE Mode Front Panel Display
3.5.4.2 39TONE Operation

See Figure 3-10 for the operation flowchart of the RF-5710A Modem in the 39TONE mode. Perform the
following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during 39TONE tone operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword 39TONE appears in the flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button to select the 39TONE mode.
d. Push the ENTER button to select the desired mode and move the cursor to the Transmit and Receive
Data Rate field. The keyword 2400 will begin to flash.
f. Perform the following procedure if operating in Coded mode:
1. Push the FIELD button to enter the displayed data rate and move the cursor to the interleaving field.
2. Push the SCROLL button to select interleaving: Long (L), Short (S), Alternate Long (AL) or
Alternate Short (AS).
3-15
OPERATION
NOTE
but it causes the longest throughput delay (10.24 seconds). Short
interleaving has a shorter throughput delay (0.85 seconds) but is
more susceptible to transmission errors.
g. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for the 39TONE mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during the 39TONE mode operation:
b. When there is an incoming receive signal present, the RF-5710A Modem will receive at the same data
rate and interleaver setting as the transmit settings. The Rx Idle display will be replaced by Rx. The
front panel of the RF-5710A Modem will display the SNR in dB in the lower left portion of the display,
next to the Rx label. The maximum SNR value displayed is 40 dB.
3-16
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
39TONE
ENTER
2400
39TONE Tx 2400 L LOCAL 1200
Rx Idle Pre:00 600
SCROLL
300
150 FIELD
FIELD
75
39TONE Tx 2400 L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:00
L F
SCROLL DONE
FIELD
S ENTER
AL 5710-606
39TONE Tx 2400L LOCAL AS
Rx Idle Pre:00
Figure 3-10. 39TONE Mode Operation Flowchart
3-17
OPERATION
3.5.5 STANAG 4539 Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)

3.5.5.1 STANAG 4539 Mode Front Panel Display
STANAG 4539 mode.
Transmit & Receive

Data Rate (bps) Interleaving
(Coded Mode)
STANAG 4539 Coded Uncoded
ANNEX B VERY LONG (VL)
9600 12,800 LONG (L)
8000 MEDIUM (M)
6400 SHORT (S)
3200
ULTRA SHORT (US)
Transmit Keyline
Indicator
indicates that output 4539 9600L LOCAL Indication
Preset Number
Asterisk added
if not stored
SNR of incoming signal Receive Data Rate (bps)
Max. value displayed: 63 dB Automatically adjusts to incoming signal.
Blank display indicates no Rx signal. When no signal is received, the display will show:
Rx Idle 5710B-607
Figure 3-11. STANAG 4539 Mode
3.5.5.2 STANAG 4539 Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)

See Figure 3-12 for the operation flowchart of the RF-5710A Modem in the STANAG 4539 mode. Perform the
following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during 110B mode operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword STANAG 4539 appears in the flashing
display.
g. Push the SCROLL button to select interleaving: Ultra Short (US), Very Short (VS), Short (S), Medium
(M), Long (L), Very Long (VL).
3-18
OPERATION
NOTE
Very long interleaving will generally provide the lowest bit error
rate but it causes the longest throughput delay (17.28 seconds).
Ultra short interleaving has a shorter throughput delay (0.5
seconds) but is more susceptible to transmission errors.
h. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for the STANAG 4539 mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during the STANAG 4539 mode
operation:
b. When a STANAG 4539 mode signal is being received, the RF-5710A Modem automatically adjusts the
data rate to the incoming signal. The Rx field of the front panel display will show the detected incoming
data rate (bps) and interleaving setting: Ultra Short (US), Very Short (VS), Short (S), Medium (M), Long
(L), and Very Long (VL). The front panel of the RF-5710A Modem will also show the SNR in dB in the
lower left portion of the display, to the left of the label Rx. The maximum SNR is 63 dB.
3-19
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:000
SCROLL
SCROLL
4539
ENTER
Tx 9600 L LOCAL 12,800 U

4539
9600
Rx Idle Pre:000
8000
SCROLL 6400
FIELD
4800
FIELD
3200
4539 Tx 9600 L LOCAL
Rx Idle Pre:000 VL
L
SCROLL M F
DONE
ENTER
FIELD
S
VS
4539 Tx 9600L LOCAL
US
Rx Idle Pre:000
5710B-608
Figure 3-12. STANAG 4539 Mode Flowchart
3-20
OPERATION
3.5.6 STANAG 5066 Annex G Mode Operation (RF-5710A-MD001 Only)
The following paragraphs describe operation of the RF-5710A Modem in the STANAG 5066 Annex G waveform
mode.
3.5.6.1 STANAG 5066 Annex G Front Panel Display
STANAG 5066 Annex G mode.
Transmit & Receive Interleaving

Data Rate (bps) (Coded Mode)
Coded Uncoded DOUBLE LONG (DL)
NATO STANAG 5066 ANNEX G LONG (L)
9600 12,800
8000 SHORT (S)
6400 ZERO (Z)
4800
3200
Transmit Keyline
Indicator
indicates that output 5066G 9600L LOCAL Indication
Preset Number
Asterisk added
SNR of incoming signal. Receive Data Rate (bps) if not stored
Max. value displayed: 63 dB or has been modified
Blank display indicates no Rx signal. Interleaving value as Tx.
Rx Idle 5710B-500A
Figure 3-13. STANAG 5066 Annex G Mode Front Panel Display
3.5.6.2 STANAG 5066 Annex G Operation
See Figure 3-14 for the operation flowchart of the RF-5710A Modem in the STANAG 5066 Annex G mode.
Perform the following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during STANAG 5066 Annex G
tone operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword 5066G appears in the flashing display.
c. Push the FIELD button to select the desired mode and move the cursor to the Transmit and Receive
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired data rate.
e. Push the FIELD button to enter the displayed data rate and move the cursor to the Interleaving field.
f. Push the SCROLL button to select interleaving: Double Long (DL), Long (L), Short (S), or Zero (Z).
3-21
OPERATION
NOTE
Double long interleaving will generally provide the lowest bit
error rate but it causes the longest throughput delay (20.48
seconds). Zero interleaving has a shorter throughput delay (0.5
seconds) but is more susceptible to transmission errors.
g. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for the STANAG 5066 Annex G mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during the STANAG 5066 Annex G
mode operation:
rate and interleaver setting as the Transmit settings. The Rx Idle display will be replaced by Rx. The
3-22
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
5066G
ENTER SCROLL
12,800 U
5066G Tx 9600 L LOCAL
9600
Rx Idle Pre:00
8000
6400
FIELD
FIELD 4800
3200
5066G Tx 9600 LOCAL
Rx Idle Pre:00
DL
F
SCROLL
L DONE
FIELD ENTER
S
5066G Tx 9600LL LOCAL Z
Rx Idle Pre:00
5710B-501B
Figure 3-14. STANAG 5066 Annex G Mode Operation Flowchart
3-23
OPERATION

The following paragraphs describe operation of the RF-5710A Modem in the STANAG 5065 waveform mode.
3.5.7.1 STANAG 5065 Front Panel Display
See Figures 3-15 and 3-16 for layout and description of the RF-5710A Modem front panel display during
operation in the STANAG 5065 mode.
Transmit Keyline Transmit Frequency Offset

Indicator
Mode Center frequency 200 HZ. Adjust in
Presence of word KEY increments of 5 Hz.
indicates that output MSK (M)
of transmitter keyline FSK (F)
MSK FSK
300 75
NATO STANAG 5065
5065M KEY 000T0 RMT:01
Local/Remote
300b 30 000R0 Pr: 000 Indication
Transmit and Receive
Data Rate (bps)
Preset Number
Asterisk added
if not stored
SNR of incoming signal. Receive Frequency Offset
Idle indicates no RX signal present.
Center frequency 200 Hz. Adjust in
increments of 5 Hz.
5710B-502B
Figure 3-15. STANAG 5065M Mode Front Panel Display
3-24
OPERATION
Transmit Frequency Offset

Transmit Keyline
Indicator
Mode Center frequency 200 Hz. Adjust in
Presence of word KEY increments of 5 Hz.
MSK (M)
indicates that output FSK (F)
MSK FSK
300 75
NATO STANAG 5065
5065F KEY 000T0 RMT:01
75b TMtr: 0 000R0 Pr:000
Transmit and Receive Local/Remote
Data Rate (bps) Indication
Preset Number
Tune Meter
Asterisk added
0=min, 9=max if not stored
The Tune Meter is used to
compensate for a radio Receive Frequency Offset
frequency inaccuracy. Manually
adjust the receive frequency Center frequency 200 Hz. Adjust in
offset until the TMtr reads increments of 5 Hz.
maximum value up to 9. 5710B-553B
Refer to Paragraph 3.5.8.5.
Figure 3-16. STANAG 5065-F Mode Front Panel Display
3.5.7.2 STANAG 5065 Operation
following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during STANAG 5065 tone operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button (if necessary) until the keyword 5065 appears in the flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button to select the 5065 mode and move the cursor to MSK/FSK (M/F) field. The
M or F field will begin to flash.
NOTE
MSK operation will transmit data at 300 bps, whereas, FSK is
limited to 75 bps.
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select MSK or FSK mode.

e. Push the ENTER button to select the desired mode.
operation:
3-25
OPERATION
next to the Rx label. The maximum SNR value that is displayed is 33 dB.

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
5065
ENTER SCROLL
MSK F
FSK ENTER
5065 M
FIELD
DONE
5065M KEY 000T0 RMT:01
300b 30 000R0 Pr: 000 5710B-503A
Figure 3-17. STANAG 5065 Mode Operation Flowchart
3-26
OPERATION
3.5.8 STANAG 4529 Mode Operation

STANAG 4529 waveform mode.
Transmit & Receive

Data Rate (bps)
FEC Coding Uncoded Coded
Coded (C) 1800 1200
1200 600
Uncoded (U) 600 Interleaving
300
NATO STANAG 4529 150 (Coded Mode)
75
LONG (L)
SHORT (S)
Transmit Keyline 4529 C 1200 L LOCAL

Indicator Local/Remote
KEY 23 Rx 1200 Pre:000 Indication
Presence of word KEY
indicates that output
of transmitter keyline Preset Number
Asterisk added
if not stored
Receive Data Rate (bps)
Max. value displayed: 23 dB Automatically locked at same Data Rate and
Blank display indicates no Rx signal. When no signal is received, the display will show:
Rx Idle
5710-303C
Figure 3-18. STANAG 4529 Mode Front Panel Display

following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during STANAG 4529 operation:
c. Push the ENTER button to select the 4529 mode and move the cursor to Coded/Uncoded (C/U) field.
The C or U field will begin to flash.
NOTE
Coded operation will result in the most error free data transfer.
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select Coded or Uncoded mode.
e. Push the ENTER button to select the desired mode and move the cursor to the Transmit and Receive
Data Rate field. The Transmit and Receive Data Rate field will begin to flash.
3-27
OPERATION
f. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired data rate.

g. Perform the following procedure if operating in Coded mode:
2. Push the SCROLL button to select Interleaving: Long (L), or Short (S).
NOTE
but will cause the longest throughput delay (20.5 seconds). Short
h. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for STANAG 4529 mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during STANAG 4529 mode
operation:
Perform the following procedure for receive signal indications:
a. During full-duplex operation of the RF-5710A Modem, when there is no incoming receive signal (RX)
the Rx display will show the word: Idle. There will be no indication in the SNR field.
b. When there is an incoming receive signal present, the RF-5710A Modem will operate at the same data
front panel of the RF-5710A Modem will show the SNR in dB in the lower left portion of the display,
next to the Rx label. The maximum SNR value that is displayed is 23 dB.
3-28
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
4529
F
SCROLL Coded F
ENTER
Uncoded ENTER
4529 Coded
ENTER
4529C Tx 1200 L LOCAL

1200
Rx Idle Pre:00
600
SCROLL
300 FIELD
FIELD
150
75
Rx Idle Pre:00
L
SCROLL F
DONE
FIELD
S ENTER 5710-304D
4529 C Tx 1200L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:00
3-29
OPERATION

See Figures 3-20 and 3-21 for layout and description of the RF-5710A Modem front panel display during
operation in the STANAG 4481 mode.
Transmit & Receive

Data Rate (bps)
Mode
PSK (P) PSK FSK
FSK (F) 300 75 Interleaving
NATO STANAG 4481 (PSK Mode)
LONG (L)
Transmit Keyline
Indicator 4481P 300L LOCAL
KEY 23 Rx Pre:000
Preset Number
Asterisk added
Rx Idle 5710A-504A
Figure 3-20. STANAG 4481-P Mode Front Panel Display
3-30
OPERATION
Transmit Keyline Receive Frequency Offset

Indicator
Center frequency 200 Hz. adjust
Presence of word KEY for maximum tune meter value.
indicates that output
NATO STANAG 4481 circuits are active.
Tune Meter
0 = min, 9 = max
Local/Remote
LOCAL Indication
4481F KEY 000: 0
600b 2000 +/ 425 Pre:000
Preset Number
Transmit and Receive
Asterisk added
Data Rate if not stored
Center Frequency and Shift
Figure 3-21. STANAG 4481F Mode Front Panel Display

c. Push the ENTER button to select the 4481 mode and move the cursor to PSK/FSK (P/F) field. The
Por F field will begin to flash.
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select PSK or FSK mode.
e. Push the ENTER button to select the desired mode.
operation:

3-31
OPERATION


Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
4481
F
PSK F
ENTER SCROLL
FSK ENTER
4481 P
4481P Tx 300 L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:00
5710A-505B
3-32
OPERATION

STANAG 4415 mode.
Transmit & Receive

Data Rate (bps)
75
Interleaving
NATO STANAG 4415 LONG (L)

SHORT (S)
ZERO (Z)
Transmit Keyline
Indicator 4415 75L LOCAL
KEY 7 Rx Pre:000
Preset Number
Asterisk added
Rx Idle 5710A-506B

c. Push the ENTER button to select the 4415 mode.
d. Perform the following procedure if operating at less than 4800 bps:
2. Push the SCROLL button to select interleaving: Long (L), Short (S), or Zero (Z).
3-33
OPERATION
NOTE
but it causes a longer throughput delay (9.6 seconds). Short and
zero interleaving have shorter throughput delays (1.2 and 0.6
seconds respectively), but are more susceptible to transmission
errors.
e. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for STANAG 4415 mode operation.

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
4415 75 L LOCAL
Rx Idle
LONG
SCROLL SHORT F
DONE
ZERO ENTER
5710A-507B
3-34
OPERATION
3.5.11 STANAG 4285 Mode Operation

STANAG 4285 mode.
Transmit & Receive

Data Rate (bps)
FEC Coding
Coded (C) Interleaving
Uncoded (U) (Coded Mode) Uncoded Coded
NATO STANAG 4285 LONG (L) 3600 2400
SHORT (S) 2400 1200
1200 600
300
150
Transmit Keyline
Indicator 4285C 1200L LOCAL 75
KEY 23 Rx Pre:000
Preset Number
Asterisk added
Rx Idle 5710-310A

c. Push the ENTER button to select the 4285 mode and move the cursor to Coded/Uncoded (C/U) field.
The C or U field will begin to flash.
NOTE
Coded operation will result in the most error free data transfer.
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select Coded or Uncoded mode.
e. Push the ENTER button to select the desired mode and move the cursor to the Transmit and Receive
3-35
OPERATION
f. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired data rate.

g. Perform the following procedure if operating in Coded mode:
2. Push the SCROLL button to select interleaving: Long (L), or Short (S).
NOTE
but it causes the longest throughput delay (10.24 seconds). Short
h. Push ENTER to enter the parameters for the STANAG 4285 mode operation.
operation:
3-36
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
4285
SCROLL
Coded F
Uncoded ENTER
4285 C
ENTER
2400
4285C Tx 2400 L LOCAL 1200
Rx Idle Pre:00 600
SCROLL
300
150 FIELD
FIELD
75

Rx Idle Pre:00
L F
SCROLL DONE
FIELD
S ENTER
5710-311B
4285 C Tx 2400L LOCAL

Rx Idle Pre:00
3-37
OPERATION
3.5.12 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Mode Operation

The following paragraphs describe operation of the RF-5710A Modem in the FSK waveform mode.
3.5.12.1 FSK Mode Front Panel Display
See Figures 3-27 and 3-29 for layout and description of the RF-5710A Modem front panel displays during
operation in the FSK mode.
3.5.12.2 FSK Operation
See Figures 3-28 and 3-30 for the operation flowcharts of the RF-5710A Modem in the FSK mode. Perform the
following procedure to select the waveform parameters available during FSK operation:
b. Push either SCROLL button if necessary, until the keyword FSK appears in the flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button to select the FSK mode and move the cursor to the Shift field. The FSK shift
type keyword will begin to flash.
NOTE
Wide Shift is the factory default setting.
d. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired center frequency and space/mark shift as shown in the
display window. If VARIABLE SHIFT mode is selected, refer to Paragraph 3.5.12.4 for information on
adjusting the mark and space frequencies.
e. Push the ENTER button to enter the desired mode and move the cursor to the Receive Frequency Offset
field. For initial operation, this field should normally be set at 000. When receiving an incoming signal,
this parameter should be adjusted for maximum value on the tune meter. See Figure 3-27. Refer to
Paragraph 3.5.12.5 for further information about adjusting the Receive Frequency Offset.
f. Push the FIELD button once more to enter the Receive Frequency Offset value and move the cursor to
the Transmit Data Rate field.
g. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the desired data rate.
h. Push the ENTER button to enter the displayed data rate and the parameters for FSK mode operation.
Perform the following procedure to change any of the operating parameters during FSK mode operation:
b. Push the SCROLL buttons to select the new setting. See Figures 3-28 and 3-30. Push ENTER to enter
the new setting.
circuits have been activated by the RF-5710A Modem (see Figures 3-27 and 3-29).
3-38
OPERATION
FSK Type Transmit Keyline Receive Frequency Offset

Indicator
FSK Wide Shift (FSKWS) Center Frequency + 200 Hz. Adjust
FSK Narrow Shift (FSKNS) Presence of word KEY for maximum tune meter value.
FSK Alternate Wide (FSKA) indicates that output
FSK Variable Shift (FSKV) of transmitter keyline
Tune Meter
0 = min, 9 = max
FSK
(Frequency Shift Keying)
Local/Remote
FSK WS KEY 000: 0 LOCAL Indication
Data Rate (bps)
600b 2000 +/ 425 Pre:000
Half & Full-Duplex
FSKWS FSKNS FSKA FSKV

Preset Number
600b 100b 150b 600b
300b 75b 100b 300b Asterisk added
150b 50b 75b 150b if not stored
100b 50b 100b
75b 75b Center Frequency and Shift or has been modified
50b 50b
FSKWS 2000 425 Hz
FSKNS 2805 42.5 Hz
FSKA 2000 85 Hz
FSKV See Figure 3-29.

5710-305C
Figure 3-27. FSK Mode Front Panel Display (FSKWS, FSKNS, FSKA)
3-39
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
FSK
F
SCROLL Wide Shift 2000 +/ 425
ENTER
Narrow Shift 2805 +/ 42.5
FSK Wide Shift Alt. Wide 2000 +/ 85 F
Variable See Figure 3-30. ENTER

2000 +/ 425
ENTER
000: 0 LOCAL 5 Hz Steps

Pre:00 +200
600b 2000 +/ 425
...0...
SCROLL
FIELD
FIELD
200
FSKWS 000: 0 LOCAL

600b 2000 +/ 425 Pre:00
FSKWS FSKNS FSKA
600b 100b 150b F
DONE
SCROLL
300b 75b 100b ENTER
150b 50b 75b

FIELD
100b 50b
FSK WS 000: 0 LOCAL 75b
600b 2000 +/ 425 Pre:00 50b
5710-306E
Figure 3-28. FSK Mode Operation Flowchart (FSKWS, FSKNS, FSKA)
3-40
OPERATION
FSK Type Transmit Keyline

Indicator Receive Frequency Offset
FSK Wide Shift (FSKWS)
FSK Narrow Shift (FSKNS) Center Frequency 200 Hz. Adjust
Presence of word KEY for maximum tune meter value.
FSK Alternate Wide (FSKA) indicates that output
FSK Variable Shift (FSKV) of transmitter keyline
Tune Meter
FSK 0 = min, 9 = max
(Frequency Shift Keying)
Local/Remote
FSK V KEY 000: 0 LOCAL Indication
Data Rate (bps)
300b 1070 M 1275 S Pre:000
Half & Full-Duplex Preset Number
FSKWS FSKNS FSKA FSKV Asterisk added
100b 150b if not stored
600b 600b
300b 75b 100b
300b
MARK & SPACE or has been modified
150b 50b 75b Frequency (Hz)
50b 150b
100b 100b RECOMMENDED MINIMUM
75b 75b SEPARATION BETWEEN MARK
50b 50b AND SPACE FREQUENCIES
FSKV Variable Mode
Space = 50 2999 Hz
Mark = 50 2999 Hz RATE (bps) SEPARATION (Hz)
600 400
300 200
NOTE 150 100
100 67
For HF radio communication, 50
the recommended range of 75
50 35
frequencies is:
Space = 350 2999 Hz
Mark = 350 2999 Hz 5710-307C
Figure 3-29. FSK Variable (FSKV) Mode Front Panel Display
3-41
OPERATION

Rx Idle Pre:00
SCROLL
SCROLL
FSK
SCROLL
FSK Variable Wide Shift See Figure 3-28 F
Narrow Shift See Figure 3-28 ENTER
Alt. Wide See Figure 3-28

Variable
+200
000: 0 LOCAL 5 Hz Steps
FSKV ...0...
300b 1070M 1275S Pre:00
FIELD
SCROLL
200
FIELD
FIELD
FSKV 000: 0 LOCAL FSKV

300b 1070M 1275S Pre:00 600b
SCROLL
300b
150b
FIELD
100b FIELD
75b
FSKV 000: 0 LOCAL 50b
300b 1070 M 1275S Pre:00
FIELD
0 0 0 0
FSKV 000: 0 1 1 1 1
SCROLL SCROLL
300b 1 070 ? 1275S 2 2 2 2
3 3 3
Note: 4 4 4
Procedure for selecting mark frequency is shown.
Use same procedure for selecting space frequency. 5 5 5
FIELD 6 6 6 F
7 7 7 ENTER
FSK V 000: 0 LOCAL 8 8 8
300b 1070M 1275 S Pre:00 9 9 9
DONE
5710-308G
Figure 3-30. FSK Variable Shift Mode (FSKV) Operation Flowchart
3-42
OPERATION
3.5.12.4 FSK Variable Shift Mode Operation Adjusting Mark and Space Frequencies
While operating the RF-5710A Modem in FSK Variable Shift mode, the mark and space frequencies may be set
to any value in the range of 50 Hz 2999 Hz (in 1 Hz increments). Table 3-4 shows the recommended minimum
separation between mark and space frequencies and the maximum useable data rates which can be achieved with
that separation.
See Figures 3-29 and 3-30. If necessary, perform the following procedure to adjust the mark and/or space
frequencies:
a. Push the FIELD button until the letter M in the Mark field (or S in the Space field) is flashing in the
display.
b. Push either SCROLL button. M (or S) will change to ? and the first digit (thousands place) of the
frequency value to be changed will begin to flash.
1. Push the SCROLL button until the desired digit appears in the display.
2. Push the FIELD button to shift to the next column to the right. If the last column is flashing, pushing
the FIELD button shifts the cursor to the first column.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the desired frequency value appears in the display.
c. Push the ENTER button to enter the displayed mark or space frequency and the parameters for FSK
Variable Shift mode operation. The associated ? will change to M (or S). The ENTER button may be
pushed at any time to enter the displayed mark or space frequency.
Table 3-4. Recommended Minimum Separation Between Mark and Space Frequencies
Rate Separation
(bps) (Hz)
600 400
300 200
150 100
100 67
75 50
50 35
3.5.12.5 Receive Frequency Offset Adjustment

When operating the RF-5710A Modem in FSK mode, it may be necessary to adjust the Receive Frequency Offset
value in order to maximize the quality of the incoming signal and minimize the data bit error rate. The Receive
Frequency Offset may be adjusted up to 200 Hz above or 200 Hz below the center frequency in increments of
5 Hz, as shown on the front panel display of the RF-5710A Modem. In FSK Variable Shift mode, the center
frequency is internally calculated. The Receive Frequency Offset should be adjusted until a maximum tune meter
value is achieved. The tune meter value is a relative value with 9 being the best possible value on the tune meter.
The lowest possible tune meter value is 0, representing a very poor signal or no incoming signal at all.
See Figures 3-27 and 3-28. If it is necessary to adjust the Receive Frequency Offset value, perform the following
procedure:
a. Push the FIELD button until the Receive Frequency Offset display is flashing.
b. Push either SCROLL button while observing the tune meter value for an increase or decrease.
3-43
OPERATION
1. If a decrease is observed, push the opposite SCROLL button until the tune meter value begins to
increase.
2. Continue pushing the SCROLL button until the tune meter value increases and begins to decrease.
3. Push the opposite SCROLL button until a maximum tune meter value is displayed.
c. Push the ENTER button to enter the displayed Receive Frequency Offset value and the parameters for
FSK mode operation. The display will stop flashing.
3.5.12.6 Special Considerations
The FSK mode supports operation at 50 bps using asynchronous DTE interface connections. In order to ensure
that an unsupported combination of RF-5710A Modem parameters (DTE interface, DTE data rate, and FSK
channel rate) cannot be configured, parameter selection must be performed such that a valid configuration is
always selected. The RF-5710A Modem software prevents the selection of parameters which represent an invalid
configuration and provides messages which indicate why the selected configuration is invalid. These messages
appear on the front panel when the RF-5710A Modem is under local control and on the remote terminal when the
RF-5710A Modem is under remote control.
As a general rule, DTE data rate and FSK channel rate should be selected last when entering and first when
leaving 50 bps FSK operation.
3.5.13 Setup Options Menu
The following paragraphs describes how to access the Setup Options Menu on the RF-5710A Modem and
configure the less frequently changed parameters. See Figure 3-32.
Perform the following procedure to access the Setup Options Menu:
a. Push the FIELD button until the keyword in the upper left hand corner of the display is flashing.
b. Push either SCROLL button until the words SETUP OPTIONS can be seen in the flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button to enter the Setup Options mode.
d. Push either SCROLL button until the name of the desired menu group is in the flashing display.
1. Push the ENTER button to branch to the appropriate sub-menu.
2. For the data port group, use either SCROLL button to select ELECTRICAL, SYNC or ASYNC,
then push ENTER.
e. Push either SCROLL button until the name of the desired item to be changed is in the flashing display.
f. Push the FIELD button to branch to the item setup list to the right of the flashing field (if it has one). If it
does not, go to Step h.
g. Push either SCROLL button until the name of the desired choice is in the flashing display.
h. Push the FIELD button until the words EXIT SETUP can be seen in the flashing display.
1. To exit Setup Options mode, push the ENTER button.
2. To continue in Setup Options mode in the same menu group:
(a.) Push the FIELD button to move to the sub-menu.
(b.) Return to Step e (above) and continue.
3-44
OPERATION
3. To continue in Setup Options mode and change to a different menu group:

(a.) Push either SCROLL button until the words more SETUP options can be seen in the
flashing display.
(b.) Push the ENTER button.
(c.) Return to Step d (above) and continue.
3.5.13.1 SETUP Serial
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for serial tone mode.
3.5.13.1.1 Duplex (Full, Half)
In full-duplex operation, the RF-5710A Modem can transmit and receive signals simultaneously.
In half-duplex operation, the RF-5710A Modem can only transmit or receive at any one time. Transmit has
priority, which means that if the RF-5710A Modem receives a Request-to-Send (RTS) from the data source while
it is receiving a signal, it will interrupt the receive activity and begin sending.
3.5.13.2 SETUP 5066G
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for the STANAG 5066 Annex G mode.
3.5.13.2.1 Duplex (Full/Half)
priority, which means that if the RF-5710A Modem receives a RTS from the data source while it is receiving a
signal, it will interrupt the receive activity and begin sending.
3.5.13.2.2 Acquisition on Data (OFF, ON)
The Acquisition on Data feature allows the RF-5710A Modem to acquire synchronization to an incoming
message without requiring initial preamble detection. (The initial preamble is a synchronization sequence which
the RF-5710A Modem transmits at the start of a message.) This feature is useful in continuous broadcast systems
and in systems where the start of a message could be missed due to severe channel fading.
Setting Acquisition on Data OFF will cause the RF-5710A Modem to synchronize only on the initial preamble.
This setting is recommended for most applications.
3.5.13.3 SETUP 4539
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for the STANAG 4539 mode.
3.5.13.3.2 Acquisition on Data (Off, On)
The Acquisition on Data On feature allows the RF-5710A Modem to acquire synchronization to an incoming
3-45
OPERATION
the RF-5710A transmits at the start of a message). This feature is useful in continuous broadcast systems and in
systems where the start of message could be missed due to severe fading conditions. This feature is NOT
recommended for Message Handling Systems (MHS) where cryptos are involved.
Setting Acquisition on Data Off will cause the RF-5710A Modem to synchronize to the initial preamble only.
3.5.13.3.3 TX TLC Blocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
The TX TLC Blocks feature allows the user to set the number of Transmit Level Control (TLC) blocks that
RF-5710A Modem transmits at the beginning of a transmission. Each TLC block is a length of 76.6 milliseconds,
providing up to 0.5367 seconds of TLC waveform at the beginning of a transmission. This part of the waveform
carries no information and is intended solely for the purpose of allowing several radio functions to settle before
the actual initial preamble is transmitted by the modem. (e.g. minimizing distortion to the preamble waveform).
The radio functions are Automatic Level Control (ALC), Transmit Level Control (TLC) and Automatic Gain
Control (AGC).
3.5.13.3.4 RX Block Limit (059999)
The RX Block Limit sets the number of interleaver blocks the modem demodulates before automatically
deacquiring. The number zero means the modems will deacquire only when the End-of-Message (EOM) is
detected or when loss of signal is detected.
3.5.13.3.5 Send TX EOM (ON/OFF)
The Send TX EOM feature determines whether the modem adds a 32-bit EOM pattern at the end of a message
(EOM ON) or whether the 32-bit EOM pattern is not sent at the end of a message (EOM OFF).
This function is only useful when combined with the feature RX Block Limit.
3.5.13.3.6 RX AGC (ON/OFF)
The RX AGC feature turns ON/OFF the AGC function in the RF-5710A Modem.
It is recommended that the modem AGC function be turned OFF when the modem is connected to a radio since
the radio already performs the AGC functions. When the modem AGC function is turned OFF, the RX AGC
LEVEL of the modem must be set to the appropriate level expected out of the radio.
3.5.13.3.7 RX AGC LEVEL (10, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40)
The RX AGC LEVEL determines the level the modem should be expecting from the radio (the level is in dBm).
The RX AGC LEVEL is only used when the modem AGC function is OFF.
3.5.13.3.8 DEACQUIRE (FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW, VERY SLOW)
The DEACQUIRE feature controls how quickly the modem deacquires due to a loss of signal. This feature is very
useful when channel conditions are such that the EOM sequence might be missed by the receiving modem.
For packet systems, faster deacquire times are recommended. For broadcast systems, slower deacquire times are
recommended. The following shows estimated times:
Fast 0 8 seconds
Medium 8 16 seconds
Slow 17 25 seconds
Very slow 25 40 seconds
3-46
OPERATION
The following are recommended settings based on the interleaver size (although user can select as desired).
US, VS Fast
S, M Medium
L Slow
VL Very slow
3.5.13.3.9 DOPPLER (FAST/SLOW)
This feature controls the doppler tracking capability of the modem. If FAST is selected, the modem can track 3.5
Hz/sec. If SLOW is selected, the modem can track 1.0 Hz/sec.
3.5.13.4 SETUP 110B
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for the US MIL-STD-188-110B mode.
recommended for Message Handling Systems (MHS) where cryptos are involved.
3.5.13.4.3 TX TLC Blocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
The TX TLC Blocks feature allows the user to set the number of TLC blocks that RF-5710A Modem transmits at
the beginning of a transmission. Each TLC block is of length 76.6 milliseconds, providing up to 0.5367 seconds
of TLC waveform at the beginning of a transmission. This part of the waveform carries no information and is
intended solely for the purpose of allowing several radio functions to settle before the actual initial preamble is
transmitted by the modem. (e.g. minimizing distortion to the preamble waveform). The radio functions are ALC,
TLC and AGC.
3.5.13.4.4 RX Block Limit (059999)
deacquiring. The number zero means the modems will deacquire only when the EOM is detected or when loss of
signal is detected.
The Send TX EOM features determines whether the modem adds a 32-bit EOM pattern at the end of a message
3-47
OPERATION
3.5.13.4.6 RX AGC (ON/OFF)

3.5.13.4.7 RX AGC LEVEL (10, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40)
Fast 0 8 seconds
Medium 8 16 seconds
Slow 17 25 seconds
US, VS Fast
S, M Medium
L Slow
VL Very slow
3.5.13.5 SETUP 110BF
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for the 110B-F mode.
NOTE
This feature will be available third quarter of 2001
(release F MCP software).
3-48
OPERATION
recommended for MHS where cryptos are involved.
3.5.13.5.3 TX TLC Blocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
The TX TLC Blocks feature allows the user to set the number of TLC blocks that RF-5710A Modem transmits at
the beginning of a transmission. Each TLC block is of length 76.6 milliseconds, providing up to 0.5367 seconds
of TLC waveform at the beginning of a transmission. This part of the waveform carries no information and is
intended solely for the purpose of allowing several radio functions to settle before the actual initial preamble is
transmitted by the modem. (e.g. minimizing distortion to the preamble waveform). The radio functions are ALC,
TLC and AGC.
3.5.13.5.4 RX Block Limit (059999)
deacquiring. The number zero means the modems will deacquire only when the EOM is detected or when loss of
signal is detected.
The Send TX EOM features determines whether the modem adds a 32-bit EOM pattern at the end of a message
3.5.13.5.6 RX AGC (ON/OFF)
3.5.13.5.7 RX AGC LEVEL (10, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40)
Fast 0 8 seconds
Medium 8 16 seconds
Slow 17 25 seconds
3-49
OPERATION
US, VS Fast
S, M Medium
L Slow
VL Very slow
3.5.13.6 SETUP 5065
3.5.13.6.2 TX Carrier (Normal/Always On)
In Normal TX Carrier mode, the RF-5710A Modem will only output audio when there is data to transmit.
In TX Carrier Always On mode, the RF-5710A Modem will always transmit a modulated carrier to the audio
connector.
3.5.13.7 SETUP 4529
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for 4529 mode.
In half-duplex operation, the RF-5710A Modem can only transmit or receive at any one time. In half-duplex
operation, transmit has priority, which means that if the RF-5710A Modem receives an RTS from the data source
while it is receiving a signal, it will interrupt the receive activity and begin sending.
3.5.13.7.2 RX Tone (800, 850, . . ., 2350, 2400)
RX Tone selects the sub-carrier frequency that the demodulator is to expect from the transmitting RF-5710A
Modem. The RX Tone frequency can be selected from 800 Hz to 2400 Hz in 50 Hz increments.
3.5.13.7.3 TX Tone (800, 850, . . ., 2350, 2400)
The TX Tone selects the sub-carrier frequency which the modulator will use. This allows the user to shift the
waveform in frequency to comply with the desired frequency assignment. The TX Tone frequency can be selected
from 800 Hz to 2400 Hz in 50 Hz increments.
3.5.13.8 SETUP 4481
3-50
OPERATION

3.5.13.9 SETUP 4415
3.5.13.10 SETUP 4285
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for 4285 mode.
priority, which means that if the RF-5710A Modem receives an RTS from the data source while it is receiving a
3.5.13.11 Setup 39Tone
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for the MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39Tone mode.
recommended for MHS where cryptos are involved.
3.5.13.11.3 Diversity (Time/Freq, Freq)
The diversity feature allows users to select the type of diversity used by the waveform to send data. For data rates
above 600 bps, the diversity setting has no effect. For data rates of 600 bps down to 75 bps, setting diversity to
Time/Freq will provide better performance on fading channels but will increase latency by a small amount (delay
depends on data rate). Both transmit and receive modems MUST have the same diversity setting.
3-51
OPERATION
3.5.13.11.4 Preamble (Long, Short)

The 39tone waveform has two different length preambles. The preamble is a specific set of tones that are
transmitted by the TX modem so that the RX modem can acquire frequency offset, symbol timing, etc. The longer
the preamble, the more robust the synchronization (but end-to-end latency increases). Both TX and RX modem
must be set to the same preamble length.
3.5.13.12 SETUP FSK
The following paragraphs describe the setup parameters for FSK mode.
priority, which means that if the RF-5710A Modem receives an RTS from the data source while it is receiving a
3.5.13.13 SETUP Data Port
After selecting the data port sub-menu, the electrical characteristics and data format of the RF-5710A Modem
DTE port (J2) can be configured. To ensure proper data transfer, care must be taken that the RF-5710A Modem
data port parameters are compatible with the DTE settings.
3.5.13.13.1 Electrical (RS-232, RS-422, RS-423, MIL-STD-188-114)
The electrical characteristics of the RF-5710A Modem DTE port can be selected from the following electrical
standards:
RS-232D
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
The MIL-STD-188-114 interface provides slower slew rates for connection to certain cryptographic devices.
3.5.13.13.2 Synchronous
In the synchronous mode, data is clocked in and out of the RF-5710A Modem DTE port with a bit synchronous
clock. The clock for the transmit data can be provided internally or from an external source. The clock for the
receive data is always provided internally. In this mode, the data rate of the DTE must match the transmit and
receive channel rates of the current operating waveform of the RF-5710A Modem.
3.5.13.13.2.1 Polarity (NORMAL, INVERTED)
The RF-5710A Modem provides the capability to invert the sense of transmit and receive data streams.
3.5.13.13.2.2 Transmit Clock Source (INT, EXT, DATA)
The RF-5710A Modem can provide either a transmit clock to the DTE, or accept one from the DTE (required by
some cryptographic equipment), or recover a clock automatically from the incoming transmit data. Set this
parameter to internal (INT) for the RF-5710A Modem to provide the clock. Set it to external (EXT) if the DTE is
going to provide the transmit clock. Set it to clock recovery mode (DATA) if the DTE operates from its own clock
and a clock input cannot be provided to the RF-5710A Modem. This mode is useful in applications where the
DTE or cryptographic device is separated from the RF-5710A Modem by a large distance.
3-52
OPERATION
NOTE
If set to EXT, the data terminal must provide a clock to the
RF-5710A Modem. If a clock is not present when an RTS is
issued, a fault will occur and the RF-5710A Modem will display
a fault message. The clock must be provided before the fault can
be cleared.
3.5.13.13.3 Asynchronous
In the asynchronous mode, the DTE port operates at a fixed data rate and the data is grouped into characters
defined by start and stop bits. External clock signals are not used in this mode.
3.5.13.13.3.1 Polarity (NORMAL, INVERTED)
The RF-5710A Modem provides the capability to invert the polarity of the transmit and receive data streams.
3.5.13.13.3.2 Rate (50, 75, 100, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps)
This parameter sets the transmit and receive DTE rates. The rate can be higher than the current waveform channel
rates; if the rate is higher, the RF-5710A Modem uses flow control to stop and start the data stream as needed to
maintain the channel rate. If this rate is set less than the waveform channel rate, the RF-5710A Modem
automatically inserts fill characters to match the channel transmit rate. Note that 50 bps rate is only used with the
FSK modes.
3.5.13.13.3.3 Stop Bits (1, 2)
This parameter sets the number of stop bits used to indicate the end of the data character.
3.5.13.13.3.4 Parity (Odd, Even, None)
Parity sets the type of character error checking recognized by the RF-5710A Modem data port.
3.5.13.13.3.5 Character Length (5, 6, 7, 8)
This parameter sets the total number of bits used to define each asynchronous data character.
3.5.13.13.3.6 Flow Control (CTS, XON/XOFF)
This parameter enables use of either a data control character (XON/XOFF) or the Clear-to-Send (CTS) signal to
control the flow of data to and from the RF-5710A Modem. When set to CTS, the RF-5710A Modem uses the
CTS signal at the data terminal interface to control flow. When set to XON/XOFF, the RF-5710A Modem inserts
special flow control characters into the data stream when it needs to regulate the flow. Most data terminals use
CTS flow control.
3.5.13.14 SETUP Remote
After selecting the Remote sub-menu, the electrical characteristics and data format of the RF-5710A Modem
remote control port can be configured. The RF-5710A Modem port parameters must match those of the remote
control terminal for proper operation of the remote control feature.
For more information regarding the remote control operation of the RF-5710A Modem, refer to Paragraph 3.11.
3-53
OPERATION
3.5.13.14.1 Multidrop (Off, On)

The remote control bus can be configured for point-to-point operation (Multidrop Off) or multidrop operation
(Multidrop On). In the point-to-point mode a single RF-5710A Modem is connected to a remote control terminal.
In the multidrop mode, several RF-5710A Modems can be connected to a remote control computer through a
common remote control bus. In the multidrop mode, each RF-5710A Modem is programmed with a unique bus
address which is used by the remote control protocol.
3.5.13.14.2 Applicable Documents
The following documents specify the capabilities and limitations of the different electrical interfaces, allowing the
selection of the best interface for the users application.
NOTE
The operator is strongly recommended to read all of the
following documents. This will provide the user with a complete
understanding necessary for optimal modem performance.
NATO STANAG 5066 Profile for Maritime High Frequency (HF) Radio Data Communications, Version
1.0. Annex D: Interface between Data Transfer Dublayer and Communications Equipment.
EIA RS-232E Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment
Employing Serial Binary Data.
EIA RS-242
MIL-STD-188-114A
MIL-STD-188C
EIA RS-422 Interface (Provides MIL-STD-188C polarities and slew rates recommended in
MIL-STD-114A.)
EIA RS-243
EIA RS-485
3.5.13.14.3 Electrical (RS-232, RS-422, RS-422-NT, RS-423, RS-485, RS-485-NT)
The electrical characteristics of the remote port can be selected from the following electrical standards:
RS-232D
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
RS-485 balanced
In multidrop mode, each RF-5710A Modem will turn on TX terminations and drivers only when transmitting a
response. Otherwise, the TX termination and drivers are disabled. The delay from the time the RF-5710A Modem
completes the transmission of its response, to the time when the termination and drivers are disabled, is 500 ms.
3-54
OPERATION
In addition, the RS-422 and RS-485 balanced modes allow the selection or removal of termination resistors.
Usually, these resistors are needed at both ends of the communications bus to eliminate unwanted signal
reflections. Their value is chosen to match the characteristic impedance of the bus. However, if several modems
are connected to the same bus then only the last modem on the bus should have its termination resistors
connected. In the RS-422 and RS-485 modes the termination resistors are connected. In the RS-422-NT and
RS-485-NT modes, the termination resistors are disconnected.
The multidrop mode is available for all the electrical interface standards.
3.5.13.14.4 Rate (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps)
This parameter sets the transmit and receive remote control terminal interface rates.
3.5.13.14.5 Stop Bits (1, 2)
This parameter sets the number of stop bits used to indicate the end of the data character.
3.5.13.14.6 Parity (Odd, Even, None)
Parity sets the type of character error checking recognized by the RF-5710A Modem remote control port.
3.5.13.14.7 Character Length (7, 8)
This parameter sets the total number of bits used to define each asynchronous remote control data character.
3.5.13.15 SETUP Display
The following paragraphs provide display setup parameter information.
3.5.13.15.1 Backlight (On, Off)
This parameter turns the LCD backlight on or off. In most indoor applications, the backlight should be set to ON.
In bright light conditions, setting the backlight to OFF may result in a better looking display. Changing this
parameter immediately affects the backlight. Pushing ENTER is not required.
3.5.13.15.2 Contrast Level (0 9)
The contrast setting affects the viewing angle and sharpness of the display characters. In most applications, the
default setting of 5 should be adequate; however in temperature extremes or when installing the RF-5710A
Modem well beyond eye level, the contrast may need to be adjusted. Changing this parameter immediately affects
the contrast. Pushing ENTER is not required.
3.5.13.16 SETUP Audio
The following paragraphs provide audio setup parameter information.
3.5.13.16.1 TX Level
The transmit audio level of the RF-5710A Modem can be adjusted via this parameter. Note that the values are in
dBm relative to a nominal 600 ohm load. If the actual load presented by the radio is something other than 600
ohms, the RF-5710A Modem output will be slightly different than the front panel value. If accuracy is needed, an
audio voltmeter should be used to measure the transmit audio while adjusting it from the front panel. Changing
this parameter immediately affects the output level. Pushing ENTER is not required.
3.5.13.16.2 TX Delay
Adjusting this parameter sets a delay between the assertion of the RF-5710A Modem keyline signal and the start
of the transmit audio signal from the RF-5710A Modem. This feature is designed to accommodate slow tuning or
keying transmitters and to ensure that no data is lost at the beginning of a transmission.
The maximum delay is 19.9 seconds. It is adjustable in 0.1 second increments. Pushing the FIELD button allows
separate digits to be selected and adjusted using the SCROLL buttons. To make the selected delay amount take
effect, press the ENTER button or use the FIELD button to go to the next selectable field.
3-55
OPERATION
3.5.13.17 SETUP Keyline

The RF-5710A Modem can automatically key the transmitter based on the status of the DTE Request-to-Send
(RTS) signal on it can manually key it from the front panel controls.
To key the transmitter automatically, set this parameter to RTS KEYS XMTR. In this mode, an RTS from the
DTE will cause the RF-5710A Modem to issue a keyline to the transmitter. When RTS is removed, the RF-5710A
Modem removes the keyline.
To key the transmitter manually, set the parameter to KEYS XMTR; this must be done before sending data. The
RF-5710A Modem keyline output will immediately be asserted, although the RF-5710A Modem will not begin
transmission until it receives an RTS from the data terminal. Wait for the transmitter to become ready before
sending data. To remove the keyline, set the parameter to UNKEY XMTR after data transmission has ended.
3.5.13.18 SETUP DTE Activity Detector
The RF-5710A provides a DTE Activity Detector feature. This feature may be used in situations where normal
RTS activity is not available or where minimum DTE wiring is required.
3.5.13.18.1 Activity Mode (ON/OFF)
When the Activity Mode is set to OFF, the RF-5710A Modem begins and ends transmission upon the RTS signal.
This is normal RTS behavior. When the DTE equipment asserts RTS the RF-5710A Modem responds with CTS.
The CTS response is an indicator that the RF-5710A Modem is ready to accept data and begin modulation. If the
RF-5710A Modem is busy with a previous RTS request, the response of the CTS will be delayed until the first
request is finished.
When the Activity Mode is set to ON the RF-5710A Modem begins transmission using the DTE TXD signal or
RTS. The end of transmission always ends based upon the DTE TXD signal.
3.5.13.18.2 Transmit Start (DATA/RTS)
When the DTE Activity Detector Activity Mode is ON and Transmit Start is set to RTS, modulation will begin
only when RTS is asserted. When configured to use RTS in this manner, RTS becomes an edge activated event
rather than a level event. For example, after first transmission to restart a second transmission, RTS must be set to
the deasserted state and then enter the asserted state.
When the DTE Activity Detector Activity Mode is ON and Transmit Start is set to DATA, the RF-5710A Modem
will begin transmission when incoming DTE Transmit Data (TXD) matching the Sync Start 16-bit pattern. Refer
to Paragraph 3.5.13.18.3.
If using the DTE in async mode, DATA is also required to begin transmission.
3.5.13.18.3 Sync Start Data (16-Bit Pattern)
In DTE sync mode, when the DTE Activity Detector Mode is ON and Transmit Start is set to DATA, the
RF-5710A Modem will begin transmission when the incoming data matches the Sync Start Data 16-bit pattern.
The 16-bit pattern is user programmable after entering the Sync Start Data mode. Use the FIELD button after
each digit selection, then press ENTER to store the bit pattern.
3.5.13.18.4 Sync Stop
In DTE sync mode, when the DTE Activity Detector Mode is ON and Transmit Start is set to DATA, the
RF-5710A Modem will end transmission when the number of bytes seen on the TXD line are either 0 or 255 for
the number setup in the Sync Stop option. A combination of 0s and 255s does not constitute a stop condition.
3.5.13.18.5 Async Stop
In DTE Async mode, when the DTE Activity Detector Mode is ON and Transmit Start is set to DATA, the
RF-5710A Modem will end transmission when data is not present on the TXD line for the number of seconds
specified in the Async Stop option.
3-56
OPERATION
3.5.13.18.6 Bid-CTS (ON/OFF)

In DTE sync mode, when the DTE Activity Detector is ON and the Bid-CTS option is set to On, the CTS signal
from the modem to a DTE device becomes a pulsed signal. The CTS pulse is provided when the modem is done
with a previous transmission and is ready to accept new data for the next transmission. This mode was
implemented because the RTS signal of some crypto devices is invalid near the end of a message transmission and
therefore the modems CTS signal would not be a valid signal (since it depends on RTS signal from the DTE
device). This problem would cause a MHS connected to the crypto, to begin providing data to a crypto before the
modem was ready to accept data since it was still busy on the last transmission.
Figure 3-31 shows the RTS/CTS signal behavior.
NORMAL RTS CTS BEHAVIOR (RS-232)

+12
RTS
12
+12
CTS
12
Bid CTS BEHAVIOR

+12
RTS
12
+12
CTS
12
RF-5710-500
Figure 3-31. RTS/CTS Signal Behavior
3-57
OPERATION
SETUP OPTIONS
SEE SHEET 2
SEE SHEET 2
110B* SERIAL 39 TONE FSK Data Port
Full Full RS232

Duplex Duplex Electrical
Half Half RS422
RS423
Full Full
Duplex Duplex MS114
Half Half
Norm
On Time/Freq Sync Polarity
Acq. on data Diversity Inverted
Off Freq
TX TLC Int
0 Tx Clock
Long Ext
Blocks . Preamble
. Short Data
.
. On Norm
Acq. on Data Async Polarity
7
Off Inverted
RX Block 00000 19200
Limit .
9600
. Rate
4800
.
2400
.
1200
59999
600
Send TX On 300
EOM Off 150
75
RX AGC On
50
Off
RX AGC 10 dB 1
Stop Bits
Level 0 dB 2
10 dB
20 dB Odd
30 dB Parity
Even
40 dB
None
DE Acquire Fast
Medium 8
Slow Char Length
7
Very slow
6
Doppler Fast 5
Slow
CTS
Flow
XON/XOFF
*RF-5710A-MD001 ONLY.
5710309J1
Figure 3-32. SETUP OPTIONS Menu (Sheet 1 of 4)
3-58
OPERATION
SEE SHEET 1 SEE SHEET 3

Remote Display Audio Keyline
Off On
Multidrop Backlight + 10 RTS keys xmtr
On Off ..
+ 2
RS-232 unkey xmtr
Electrical 0
RS-422 9 Tx level
RS-422-NT 2
8 key xmtr
RS-423 4
RS-485 7
6
RS-485-NT 6
8
5
Contrast level 10
4
12
3
14
2
16
115200* 1 ..
Rate
576000* 0
40
38400*
19200
1 9 .9
9600 TX Delay +
0 8 .8
4800
7 .7
2400
6 .6
1200
5 .5
1 4 .4
Stop Bits
2 3 .3
2 .2
Odd 1 .1
Parity
Even 0 .0
None
1
Char Length
2
Modem ID F F
E E
.. ..
.. ..
1 1
0 0
5710309H2
3-59
OPERATION

Activity Detector 5066G* 5065* 4539
Off Full Full Full

Activity Mode Duplex Duplex Duplex
On Half Half Half
Data
Transmit Start On Always On On
RTS Acq. on data Tx Carrier Acq. on data
Off Normal Off
TX TLC
Sync Start Data 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 Blocks .
2 2 2 2 .
. . . . .
. . . . .
9 9 9 9 7
A A A A RX Block 00000
. . . .
. . . . Limit .
. . . . .
F F F F .
Sync Stop OFF .

1 bYTE 59999
2
. Send TX On
. EOM Off
10
20 RX AGC On
30 Off
. RX AGC 10 dB
.
Level 0 dB
500 bytes
10 dB
OFF 20 dB
Async Stop
0.3 s 30 dB
0.4 s 40 dB
0.5 s DE Acquire Fast
. Medium
. Slow
1.0 s Very slow
2.0 s
Doppler Fast
.
Slow
.
10.0 s
30.0 s
60.0 s
BidCTS Off
On
5710309J3
3-60
OPERATION
SEE SHEET 3
SEE SHEET 3
4529 4481* 4415* 4285 110B-F*
Full Full Full

Duplex Duplex Full Duplex
Half Half Duplex Half
Half
Full On
Acq. on data
Duplex
Half Off
TX TLC
0
2400
RX Tone Blocks .
2350 .
. .
. .
. 7
850 RX Block 00000
800 Limit .
2400 .
TX Tone . F
2350
. . ENTER
. 59999
. Send TX On
850 EOM Off SCROLL
800
RX AGC On
Off
RX AGC 10 dB
Level 0 dB
10 dB
20 dB
30 dB
40 dB
DE Acquire Fast
Medium
Slow
*RF-5710A-MD001 ONLY. Very slow
Doppler Fast
Slow
SCROLL
F
FIELD ENTER
exit SETUP more SETUP items
ENTER (Return to current operating mode.)

5710309J4
3-61
OPERATION
3.6 CHANGING FROM LOCAL CONTROL TO REMOTE CONTROL

Perform the following procedure to change from local control to remote control:
a. Push the FIELD button until the keyword for LOCAL operation in the upper right corner of the display is
flashing.
b. Push one of the SCROLL buttons to change the operating mode to REMOTE. The keyword RMT:
followed by the RF-5710A Modem ID number will appear in the flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem will now be in remote control and will display its
operating mode on the front panel display.
3.7 CHANGING FROM REMOTE CONTROL TO LOCAL CONTROL
Perform the following procedure to change from remote control to local control:
a. Push the FIELD button. The keyword RMT: will flash in the upper right corner of the display.
b. To change the operating mode, proceed to Step c. To keep the current operating mode, push the ENTER
button.
c. To change the operating mode from remote to local, push the SCROLL button. The keyword LOCAL
will appear in the flashing display. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem screen will display
ENTERING LOCAL CONTROL.
d. After displaying the message, the screen will display the waveform operating mode set during remote
control operation.
3.8 VERSIONS MODE AND CHECKSUM VALUES
Selecting the VERSIONS mode causes the checksum value and revision level of the RF-5710A Modem software
to be displayed. These values allow field service personnel to verify the revision of the software programmed into
the RF-5710A Modem.
3.9 RF-5710A MODEM RESET
Perform the following procedure to restore factory preset operating parameters:
NOTE
For the purpose of demonstrating the correct operating
procedures for the RF-5710A Modem, the first step in the
instructional procedure will involve resetting the selected
waveform to the factory presets. This is only for demonstration
purposes and will not be necessary during normal operation of
the RF-5710A Modem.
a. Push the FIELD button once. The keyword for the waveform type (in the upper left corner of the display)
will begin flashing.
b. Push one of the SCROLL buttons. Continue pushing the button until the word RESET appears in the
flashing display.
c. Push the ENTER button. The word no is the default choice and will be flashing in the display.
d. Push either SCROLL button. The word yes is now flashing in the display.
3-62
OPERATION
e. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem waveform operating parameters have now been reset to
the factory default values. The display indicates that the RF-5710A Modem is set for SERIAL waveform
operation with a transmit (TX) data rate of 2400 bits per second (bps) with Long interleaving (L). Receive
is currently IDLE because there is no incoming signal.
3.10 PRESET MODE
Selecting the PRESET menu allows the user to save the current configuration of the RF-5710A Modem or recall a
previously stored RF-5710A Modem configuration. The RF-5710A Modem is provided with 16 preset memories.
3.10.1 Saving a PRESET Configuration
Perform the following procedure to save a preset configuration:
a. Push the FIELD button once. The keyword for the waveform type (in the upper left hand corner of the
display) will begin flashing.
b. Push one of the SCROLL buttons. Continue pushing the button until the word PRESET appears in the
flashing display. Press ENTER.
c. Push one of the SCROLL buttons until the words save preset are blinking.
d. Push the FIELD button to select the preset number option. Use the SCROLL buttons to select the desired
preset.
e. Push the ENTER button to save the preset. SAVING PRESET will temporarily be displayed on the front
panel.
3.10.2 Loading a PRESET Configuration
Perform the following procedure to load a preset configuration:
a. Push the FIELD button once. The keyword for the waveform type (in the upper left hand corner of the
display) will begin flashing.
b. Push one of the SCROLL buttons. Continue pushing the button until the word PRESET appears in the
flashing display. Press ENTER.
c. Push one of the SCROLL buttons until the words load preset are blinking.
d. Push the FIELD button to select the preset number option. Use the SCROLL buttons to select the desired
preset.
e. Push the ENTER button to load the preset. LOADING PRESET will temporarily be displayed on the
front panel.
3-63
OPERATION
3.11 REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

The RF-5710A Modem is equipped with remote port (J3) which can be used to control the RF-5710A Modem
remotely. The remote port can be connected to a computer for automatic operation or to a simple ASCII terminal
for manual operation. All commands and status responses are defined in ASCII characters and are human
readable. Shortened versions of the commands are also supported for more efficient operation with a computer
control system.
The remote port is configurable for point-to-point operation whereby a single RF-5710A Modem is connected to a
control computer or multidrop operation whereby a number of RF-5710A Modems can be connected on a
common control bus to the control computer. In addition, the electrical interface characteristics
(RS-232/RS-423/RS-422/RS-485), data rate, and asynchronous character specification are also configurable as
described in Table 3-5. The remote port settings are configurable only from the front panel of the RF-5710A
Modem must match the settings on the control computer or terminal.
Table 3-5. Remote Port Settings (Front Panel Control Only)
Parameter Values Comments
Port type Normal / Multidrop
Electrical RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485
Termination resistors Yes / No RS-423 and RS-485 only.
Multidrop address 0 255 Multidrop mode only.
Data rata 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Data bits 7, 8 8 bits only in multidrop mode.
Stop bits 1, 2
Parity No / Odd / Even
Remote Operation Remote / Local
3.11.1 Point-to-Point Protocol

All commands on the Remote Port are issued via a command string. Each command string is comprised of a
command word, followed by zero or one parameters, and is terminated with a carriage return (0x0D). The
command string format is shown below.
[cmd] [parm1] <CR>
Each field in the string must be separated by at least one space character (0x20).
3.11.1.1 Commands
Commands are not case sensitive. For example, the command help is the same as HELP.
3.11.1.2 Parameters
Parameters may be alpha or numeric characters, and they also are not case sensitive.
3.11.1.3 Termination
Command strings must be terminated with a single carriage return character <CR> value 0x0D.
3.11.1.4 Command Echo
In the point-to-point mode, the remote port will always operate in full-duplex mode. Characters sent into the
remote port will be echoed back to the remote control device.
3-64
OPERATION
3.11.1.5 Processing Time

Characters will not be immediately echoed to the remote terminal if a command is currently being processed. The
characters will be echoed to the remote terminal after the command is finished processing and a RMT> prompt
has been sent to the remote terminal.
3.11.1.6 Multiple Commands
Multiple commands cannot be entered in a single command string. For example, the following command string is
not a valid command line:
RMT> SHOW HELP MODEM TYPE SERIAL <CR>
3.11.1.7 BITE Operation
Characters received from the remote terminal during the execution of Built-In-Test (BIT) (entering TEST) will
not be echoed and will be ignored.
3.11.1.8 Responses
If a valid command is recognized and processed properly, the RF-5710A Modem will return an ASCII status
string indicating the current status of the configuration item followed by the confirmation prompt. The
confirmation prompt is the RMT> ASCII character string.
If an invalid command is sent or a command did not process properly, the RF-5710A Modem will return an error
prompt. The error prompt is the ***ERROR*** ASCII character string followed by RMT>.
3.11.1.9 Status Only Commands
Entering a command without a parameter returns the current setting of the configuration item. For example:
RMT>modem type
Modem Type SERIAL
3.11.1.10 Local to Remote Operation
Changing control from local to remote causes a SHOW command to be executed, which shows the current state
of the RF-5710A Modem on the remote terminal.
3.11.2 Multidrop Protocol
When the multidrop function is enabled, the point-to-point protocol described in Paragraph 3.11.1 is augmented
with additional control fields to support individual addressing of the RF-5710A Modems. The additional fields are
described below.
Each command sent to the RF-5710A Modem is prefaced with an eight-bit bus address. The RF-5710A Modem
responses are similarly formatted with the RF-5710A Modem bus address. The multidrop protocol also supports a
number of commands specified in STANAG 5066 Annex D.
The command string format and response are shown below:
Command: [address] [cmd] [parm1] <CR>
Response: [address] [response]<LF> <CR> RMT>
3.11.2.1 Commands
Commands are not case sensitive. For example, the command help is the same as HELP.
3-65
OPERATION
3.11.2.2 Parameters
Parameters may be alpha or numeric characters, and they also are not case sensitive.
3.11.2.3 Termination
Command strings must be terminated with a single carriage return character <CR> value 0x0D.
3.11.2.4 Command Echo
In the multidrop mode, the remote port will not echo characters sent to the remote port. A response will only be
sent at the completion of the command string.
3.11.2.5 Processing Time
Characters will not be immediately echoed to the remote terminal if a command is currently being processed. The
characters will be echoed to the remote terminal after the command is finished processing and a RMT> prompt
has been sent to the remote terminal.
3.11.2.6 Multiple Commands
Multiple commands cannot be entered in a single command string. For example, the following command string is
not a valid command:
RMT> <0x01> SHOW HELP MODEM TYPE SERIAL <CR>
3.11.2.7 BITE Operation
Characters received from the remote terminal during the execution of BIT (entering TEST) will be ignored.
3.11.2.8 Responses
If a valid command is recognized and processed properly, the RF-5710A Modem will return an ASCII status
string indicating the current status of the configuration item followed by the confirmation prompt. The
confirmation prompt is the RMT> ASCII character string.
If an invalid command is sent or a command did not process properly, the RF-5710A Modem will return an error
prompt if the address of the RF-5710A Modem is understood in the command string, or if this is not the case then
there will be no response. The error prompt is the ***ERROR*** ASCII character string followed by RMT>.
3.11.2.9 Status Only Commands
Entering a command without a parameter value indicates that the operator wants to see the current setting of the
configuration item. For example:
Command: RMT> <0x01> modem type
Response: <0x01> Modem Type SERIAL<LF> <CR> RMT>
3.11.2.10 Local to Remote Operation
Changing control from local to remote will not generate a status message.
3.11.3 Remote Control Commands
Table 3-6 lists the remote control commands that can be sent to the RF-5710A Modem.
NOTE
The underlined characters are the minimum number of characters
that must be entered for the command word to be recognized.
3-66
OPERATION
Table 3-6. Remote Control Commands

Command Description
ACTIVITY Returns a list of the current Activity Detector
option settings.
ACTIVITY ASYNCSTOP < OFF, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .8, .9, When using the Activity Detector, transmission
1, 2, 3, 4, 5. 10, 30, 60 always ends in DTE async mode when data is not
present on the TXD line for the number of
seconds setup under the Async Stop option.
ACTIVITY MODE < OFF, ON > This setting activates/deactivates the DTE
Activity Detector mode.
ACTIVITY START < 0,..F >< 0,..F>< 0,..F >< 0,..F > This option is used to setup a 16-bit pattern. 4
hexadecimal digits must be entered. When using
the DTE sync mode, if the pattern is present to the
DTE TXD signal and the Activity Detector is on,
transmission will begin.
ACTIVITY STOP < OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, When using the Activity Detector, transmission
30, 40, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 > always ends in DTE sync mode when the number
of bytes seen on the TXD line are either value 0
or 255 for the number setup in the Sync Stop
option. A combination of 0s and 255s does not
constitute a stop condition.
ACTIVITY TXSTART, <RTS, DATA>. When set to data, data present on the DTE TXD
signal begins transmission. The RTS setting
makes the RTS signal edge sensitive and
transmission begins when this occurs. If using the
DTE in async mode, data is also required to begin
transmission.
ACTIVITY Bid-CTS <OFF, ON> BID Crypto CTS option for NATO MHS.
ACTIVITY SHOW Displays the current Activity Detector settings
ACTIVITY HELP or ? Displays the Activity Detector commands.
ASYNC Determines the current state of the DTE port
asynchronous parameters.
ASYNC RATE <50, 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, Sets the DTE port asynchronous baud rate. Note
9600, 19200> that 50 bps is available only for FSK modes.
ASYNC BITS <5, 6, 7, 8> Sets the DTE port asynchronous bits per
character.
ASYNC STOP BITS <1, 2> Sets the DTE port asynchronous number of stop
bits.
ASYNC PARITY <NONE, ODD, EVEN> Sets the type of parity to use for the asynchronous
DTE port.
ASYNC FLOW <XONXOFF, CTS> Selects the type of low control to be used with the
asynchronous DTE port.
3-67
OPERATION
Table 3-6. Remote Control Commands Continued

Command Description
ASYNC POLARITY <NORMAL, INVERTED> Selects the polarity of data used with the
asynchronous DTE port.
NORMAL space (V+), mark (V)
INVERTED space (V), mark (V+)
ASYNC SHOW Determines the current state of the asynchronous
DTE port parameters.
ASYNC HELP Returns a list of commands available to change the
asynchronous DTE port parameters.
ASYNC ? Returns a list of commands available to change the
asynchronous DTE port parameters. Equivalent to
entering an ASYNC HELP command.
FTUNE <+, , 0> Allows operator to tune an FSK signal being
received.
HELP Returns a list of remote control commands
available.
INITIALIZE Causes the active preset parameters to immediately
be reloaded into the modem. This is a STANAG
5066 remote control command.
METER Returns the FSK tune meter value. This command
is used with the FTUNE command to tune an FSK
receive signal.
MODEM Returns the current state of the modem. Equivalent
to entering a MODEM SHOW command.
MODEM TOFFSET (MD001 Modem version only) Changes and sets the 5065 FSK/MSK Transmit
Frequency Offset. (200 Hz in increments of 5 Hz)
MODEM ROFFSET (MD001 Modem version only) Changes and sets all the FSK waveforms Receive
Frequency Offset. (200 Hz in increments of 5 Hz)
MODEM TCARRIER <Normal, Always> Valid only for 5065 FSK/MSK mode. The
(MD001 Modem version only) ALWAYS setting turns the transmit audio on,
independent of any DTE data. When set to normal,
the transmit audio begins only when RTS and/or
data is present, the same as other waveform modes.
3-68
OPERATION

Command Description
MODEM PORT <ASYNC, SYNC> Selects whether the data port will use a
synchronous or asynchronous interface.
MODEM TYPE <SERIAL, 5066G, 110B-F, 110B, 4539, Selects the modem waveform to receive and
39TONE, 5065M, 5065F, 4529C, 4529U, 4481P, transmit.
4481F, 4415, 4285C, 4285U, FSKWS, FSKNS,
FSKA, FSKV (5066G, 110B-F, 110B, 4539, 5065M,
5065F, 4415, 4481P and 4481F are only available in the
RF-5710A-MD001.)
MODEM RATE Sets modem over the air baud rate. Note that 50
<50, 75, 100, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, bps is only used for FSK modes.
3200, 3600, 4800, 6400, 8000, 9600, 12800, 16000,
19200>
MODEM INTERLEAVE Selects interleaving type.
<DOUBLELONG, VERYLONG LONG, NOTE: Interleaver choices depend on waveform
MEDIUM, SHORT, VERYSHORT selected.
ULTRASHORT ZERO>
MODEM HELP Returns a menu listing all modem parameters that
can be executed.
MODEM ? Returns a menu listing all modem parameters that
can be executed. Equivalent to entering MODEM
HELP command.
MODEM ACQONDATA <ON, OFF> Only valid for STANAG 5066G. Selects whether
the modem should acquire synchronization in the
middle of a data stream or optimize for short data
packets.
MODEM KEYLINE <ON, OFF, RTS> Sets the keyline from the modem to the
transmitter.
ON: The transmit keyline is set to the keyed
state. The RTS input can no longer be
used to key or unkey the transmitter.
OFF: The transmit keyline is set to the unkeyed
state. The RTS input can no longer be
used to key or unkey the transmitter.
RTS: The transmit keyline is controlled by the
data port RTS signal. RTS active keys the
transmitter.
MODEM IDENTITY Displays the model, manufacturer and firmware
revisions for the modem. This is a STANAG 5066
remote control command.
MODEM ELECTRICAL Sets the electrical interface mode of the DTE port.
Valid options are RS-232, RS-422, RS-423 and
MS-114. This option takes effect immediately
upon selection. If entered without a setting the
current value is returned. This is a STANAG 5066
remote control command.
3-69
OPERATION

Command Description
MODEM DUPLEX <HALF, FULL> Selects whether modem operation will be half or
full-duplex.
MODEM TXLEVEL <+10, +8, +6, +4,+2, 0, 2, 4, 6, Sets the modem audio output level to the
8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, transmitter for nominal 600 ohm interface.
32, 34, 36, 38, 40>
MODEM DELAY <0 19.9> Programs transmit audio delay offset in units of
100 milliseconds.
MODEM MARK <50 2999> Programs the frequency used to transmit a mark
while in FSK variable mode.
MODEM SPACE <50 2999> Programs the frequency used to transmit a space
while in FSK variable mode.
MODEM SNR Returns the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive
signal when the modem is being operated in the
single-tone modes.
MODEM SNR? Displays the current SNR of the modem. IDLE
will be displayed if the modem is not receiving.
This is a STANAG 5066 remote control
command. This is a STANAG 5066 remote
control command.
MODEM SHOW Shows the current state of the modem.
MODEM WAVEFORM Sets a STANAG waveform active. Valid options
are 4285, 4529, 110B and HIGH. HIGH selects
the waveform that provides the highest on the air
data rate. This command takes effect immediately.
If entered without a setting the current value is
returned. This is a STANAG 5066 remote control
command.
MODEM 110B TXEOM <ON, OFF> Selects whether the EOM sequence is transmitted.
This command is only available in the 110B mode
of operation.
MODEM 110B TLC <0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7> Set the number of TLC blocks sent at the
beginning of transmission. This command is only
available in the 110B mode of operation.
MODEM 110B RXAGC <ON, OFF> Selects the Modems AGC function to be either
ON or OFF. This command is only available in
the 110B mode of operation.
MODEM 110B DEACQUIRE <VERYSLOW, SLOW, Controls how quickly a modem deacquires due to
MEDIUM, FAST> a loss of signal with no EOM detection or bad
channel conditions (i.e. bad data).
MODEM 110B DOPPLER <FAST, SLOW> Controls the doppler tracking capability of the
modem.
3-70
OPERATION

Command Description
MODEM 110B RXAGCLEVEL <10, 0, -10, -20, -30, Selects the level the modem should expect from
-40> the radio (default is 0 dBm). This command is
only available in the 110B mode of operation.
MODEM 110B RXLIMIT <0(OFF)1,2, .....59999> Selects the number of interleaver blocks the
receive modem demodulated before automatically
deacquiring. Value 0 means that no blocks will be
counted effectively, turning off this function. This
command is only available in the 110B mode of
operation.
MODEM 110B ACQONDATA <ON, OFF> Only valid for 110B. Selects whether the modem
should acquire synchronization in the middle of a
data stream or optimize for short data packets.
MODEM 110B-F TXEOM <ON, OFF> Selects whether the EOM sequence is transmitted.
This command is only available in the 110B-F
mode of operation.
MODEM 110B-F TLC <0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7> Set the number of TLC blocks sent at the
beginning of transmission. This command is only
available in the 110B-F mode of operation.
MODEM 110B-F RXAGC <ON, OFF> Selects the Modems AGC function to be either
ON or OFF. This command is only available in
the 110B-F mode of operation.
MODEM 110B-F DEACQUIRE <VERYSLOW, SLOW, Controls how quickly a modem deacquires due to
MODEM 110B-F DOPPLER <FAST, SLOW> Controls the doppler tracking capability of the
modem.
MODEM 110B-F RXAGCLEVEL <10, 0, -10, -20, -30, Selects the level the modem should expect from
only available in the 110B-F mode of operation.
MODEM 110B-F RXLIMIT <0(OFF)1,2, .....59999> Selects the number of interleaver blocks the
command is only available in the 110B-F mode of
operation.
MODEM 110B-F ACQONDATA <ON, OFF> Only valid for 110B-F. Selects whether the
modem should acquire synchronization in the
packets.
MODEM 4539 TXEOM <ON, OFF> Selects whether the EOM sequence is transmitted.
This command is only available in the 4539 mode
of operation.
3-71
OPERATION

Command Description
MODEM 4539 TLC <0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7> Set the number of Transmit Level Control (TLC)
blocks sent at the beginning of transmission. This
command is only available in the 4539 mode of
operation.
MODEM 4539 RXAGC <ON, OFF> Selects the Modems Automatic Gain Control
(AGC) function to be either ON or OFF. This
command is only available in the 4539 mode of
operation.
MODEM 4539 DEACQUIRE <VERYSLOW, SLOW, Controls how quickly a modem deacquires due to
MODEM 4539 DOPPLER <FAST, SLOW> Controls the doppler tracking capability of the
modem.
MODEM 4539 RXAGCLEVEL <10, 0, -10, -20, -30, Selects the level the modem should expect from
only available in the 4539 mode of operation.
MODEM 4539 RXLIMIT <0(OFF)1,2, .....59999> Selects the number of interleaver blocks the
command is only available in the 110B mode of
operation.
MODEM 4539 ACQONDATA <ON, OFF> Only valid for STANAG 4539. Selects whether
the modem should acquire synchronization in the
packets.
MODEM 39TONE DIVERSITY <timefreq,time> For data rates above 600 bps, the diversity setting
has no effect. For data rates of 600 bps down to
75 bps, setting diversity to timefreq will provide
better performance on fading channels but will
increase latency by a small amount (delay
depends on data rate). Both transmit and receive
modems MUST have the same diversity setting.
MODEM 39TONE PREAMBLE <long, short> The 39TONE waveform has two different length
preambles. The preamble is a specific set of
tones that are transmitted by the TX modem so
that the RX modem can acquire frequency offset,
symbol timing, etc. The longer the preamble, the
more robust the synchronization (but end-to-end
latency increases). Both TX and RX modem must
be set to the same preamble length.
MODEM 39TONE ACQONDATA <ON, OFF> Only valid for 39TONE. Selects whether the
modem should acquire synchronization in the
packets.
3-72
OPERATION

Command Description
MODEM AVGSNR Returns the average SNR of the received
waveform over a one-minute period when the
modem is being operated in the single-tone
modes. SNR values that are more than twice the
average distance from the mean are not included
in the average calculation.
MODEM PREVRATE Returns the current rate and interleaver if a
receive is in progress, and returns the previous
rate and interleaver if the modem is idle.
MODEM RXTONEFREQ <800, 850,, 2350, 2400> Selects the sub-carrier frequency that the
demodulator is to expect from the transmitting
modem. Only applies to STANAG 4529.
MODEM TXTONEFREQ <800, 850, , 2350, 2400> Selects the sub-carrier frequency the modulator
will use. Only applies to STANAG 4529.
PRESET Displays the currently active preset. If a modem
parameter has been or attempted to have been
modified, the preset number will be prefixed with
an asterisk. Example: *00 conveys that the active
(implies the power up default) preset is 00 and the
user has modified on of the modems settings.
PRESET LOAD XXX This command will load the modems current
settings with a preset from non-volatile memory.
Valid preset number options are 0 199 for
RF-5710A-MD001 Modem and 0 15 for
RF-5710A-MD002 Modem. It is an error to
execute this command without a preset number
suffix (PR LO xx). Using this command to load a
preset will set the active (implies the power up
default) preset to the one selected.
PRESET SAVE XXX This command will take the current modem state
and save it to a preset number. Valid preset
number options are 0 199 for
RF-5710A-MD001 Modem and 0 15 for
RF-5710A-MD002 Modem. It is an error to
execute this command without a preset number
suffix (PR SA xx). Saving a preset does not
modify the active (implies the power up default)
preset.
3-73
OPERATION

Command Description
REMOTE Returns the current setting of all the following
parameters: remote char length, remote stop bits,
remote data rate, remote multidrop mode, remote
electrical mode and remote multidrop ID.
REMOTE HELP, REMOTE ? Lists a short help screen to the terminal
summarizing the remote control oriented
commands.
REMOTE BITS Sets the remote character length. Valid options are
7 and 8 bits. If entered without a setting the
current value is returned. This option does not
take effect until it is stored in preset memory and
the modem is reset or power cycled.
REMOTE STOPBITS Sets the remote control number of stop bits. Valid
options are 1 and 2. If entered without a setting
the current value is returned. This option does not
take effect until it is stored in preset memory and
the modem is reset or power cycled.
REMOTE RATE Sets the remote control baud rate. Valid options
are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200. If entered
without a setting the current value is returned.
This option does not take effect until it is stored in
preset memory and the modem is reset or power
cycled.
REMOTE ID Sets the remote control multidrop ID value. Valid
options are 00 ff (hexadecimal number base). If
entered without a setting the current value is
returned. This option does not take effect until it
is stored in preset memory and the modem is reset
or power cycled.
REMOTE MULTIDROP Sets the multidrop mode of the remote control.
Valid options are ON and OFF. If entered without
a setting the current value is returned. This option
does not take effect until it is stored in preset
memory and the modem is reset or power cycled.
3-74
OPERATION

Command Description
REMOTE ELECTRICAL Sets the electrical mode of the remote control
interface. Valid options are RS-232, RS-422,
RS-422NT, RS-423, RS-485 and RS-485NT. If
entered without a setting the current value is
returned. This option does not take effect until it is
stored in preset memory and the modem is reset or
power cycled. NT is an abbreviation for No
Termination. When an NT mode is selected, the
normally connected internal termination resistors
will not be connected to the remote control
interface.
RESET Resets modem, similar to power down power up.
SHOW Returns the current state of the modem.
SYNC Returns the current synchronous DTE parameters.
SYNC TXCLOCK <INPUT, OUTPUT, DATA> Selects whether the synchronous DTE transmit
clock is supplied by the data terminal (INPUT), or
the modem (OUTPUT), or recovered from the
incoming transmit data (DATA).
SYNC POLARITY <NORMAL, INVERTED> Selects the polarity of data used with the
synchronous DTE port.
NORMAL space (V+) mark (V)
INVERTED space (V) mark (V+)
SYNC SHOW Returns the current synchronous DTE parameters.
SYNC HELP Returns the commands available for changing the
synchronous DTE parameters.
SYNC ? Returns the commands available for changing the
synchronous DTE parameters. Equivalent to
entering SYNC HELP.
TEST Starts BIT function of the modem.
REPORT Returns detailed information about the results of the
most recent execution of the TEST command
(executed from either the front panel or remote).
AudLoopback <on, off> Causes the modem to loop the transmit audio to the
receive input.
NOTE
Once Aud Loopback has been started, an
AudLoopback off command must be entered
before the modem can transmit audio again.
VERSIONS Returns the checksums of all the firmware packages
in the modem.
ZERO Resets all modem parameters (except remote and
control parameters) to factory default values.
? Equivalent to entering HELP command.
3-75
OPERATION
3.11.3.1 Command Parameters

Certain parameter values have limited ranges, and some parameter values are fixed. If remote control commands
attempt to change fixed parameters or exceed the acceptable range of limited parameters, the RF-5710A Modem
ignores the command, as shown below (operator input is in boldface type).
RMT>modem type FSKWS

RMT>modem rate 1200
Modem port sync
Modem rate 600
RMT>
The RF-5710A Modem substitutes the closest available rate to the one requested by the RF-5710A Modem rate
command (600 is the highest rate that FSKWS can achieve).
3.11.3.2 Valid Modem Configurations
Table 3-7 lists the valid RF-5710A Modem configurations that can be commanded from the remote port.
Table 3-7. Functions Available for Waveform Type Selected
Acquisition Mark/Space Modem Signal
Waveform on Data is Frequency to Noise Autobaud Half/Full
Type Baud Rate Interleaving Valid (Hz) Measurement on Receive Duplex
Serial Tone 75, 150, Long, No N/A Yes Yes Half/Full
300, 600, Short,
1200,2400 or Zero
4800
STANAG 3200, 4800, Double Long, Yes N/A Yes Yes Half/Full
5066 Annex G 6400, 8000, Long, Short, or
9600, 12,800 Zero
4539 Mode 3200, 4800, Very Long, Yes N/A Yes Yes Half/Full
6400, 8000, Long,
9600, 12,800 Medium
Short,
Very Short,
Ultra Short
STANAG 300 N/A No N/A Yes No Half/Full
5065M
STANAG 75 N/A No N/A No No Half/Full
5065F
STANAG 75, 150, Long, Short No N/A Yes No Half/Full
4529 (Coded) 300, 600,
1200
STANAG 600, 1200, 1800 Zero No N/A Yes No Half/Full
4529
(Uncoded)
STANAG 300 Long No N/A Yes No Half/Full
4481P
STANAG 75 N/A No N/A No No Half/Full
4481F
STANAG 75 Long, Short, No N/A Yes No Half/Full
4415 Zero
3-76
OPERATION
Table 3-7. Functions Available for Waveform Type Selected Continued

Acquisition Mark/Space Modem Signal
Waveform on Data is Frequency to Noise Autobaud Half/Full
Type Baud Rate Interleaving Valid (Hz) Measurement on Receive Duplex
STANAG 75, 150, Long, Short No N/A Yes No Half/Full
4285 (Coded) 300, 600,
1200, 2400
39TONE 75, 150, Long, Short, No N/A Yes No Half/Full
300, 600, Alternate Long,
1200, 2400 Alternate Short
110B 75, 150,300, Very Long, Yes N/A Yes Yes Half/Full
600,1200, 2400, Long,
3200, 4800, Medium
6400, 8000, Short,
9600, 12,800 Very Short,
Ultra Short,
Zero
110B-F 9600, 12,800, Very Long, Yes N/A Yes Yes Half/Full
16,000, 19,200 Long, (Available
Medium third quarter
Short, 2001)
Very Short,
Ultra Short
STANAG 1200, 2400, Zero No N/A Yes No Half/Full

4285 3600
(Uncoded)
FSKNS 50*, 75, 100 N/A No Mk.= No No Half/Full
(Narrow Shift) 2762.5
Sp.=2847.5
FSKWS 50*, 75, 100, N/A No Mk.=1575 No No Half/Full
(Wide Shift) 150, 300, Sp.=2425
600
FSKA 50*, 75, 100, N/A No Mk.=1915 No No Half/Full
(Alternate 150 Sp.=2085
Wide)
FSKV 50*, 75, 100, N/A No 502999 No No Half/Full
(Variable 150, 300, (Configurable)
Shift) 600
*50 bps is supported only for asynchronous DTE interfaces.
3.11.3.3 Default Factory Modem Configuration

Table 3-8 lists the RF-5710A default modem configurations available after the modem has been set to the factory
default settings. Table 3-9 contains several unique default modem configurations for the MIL-STD-188-110B.
Table 3-10 contains default modem configurations for the 39TONE.
Table 3-8. Default Factory Modem Configurations
Mark/Space
Baud Acquisition Frequency Autobaud on Half/Full
Waveform Type Rate Interleaving on Data (Hz) Receive Duplex
Serial Tone 2400 Long N/A N/A Yes Full
STANAG 5066 Annex G 9600 Long OFF N/A Yes Full
MIL-STD-188-110B 4800 Short OFF N/A Yes Half
3-77
OPERATION
Table 3-8. Default Factory Modem Configurations Continued

Mark/Space
Baud Acquisition Frequency Autobaud on Half/Full
Waveform Type Rate Interleaving on Data (Hz) Receive Duplex
MIL-STD-188-110B-Appendix F 9600 Short OFF N/A Yes Half
STANAG 4539 Annex B Section 4 4800 Short OFF N/A Yes Half
STANAG 5065M 300 N/A N/A N/A No Full
STANAG 5065F 75 N/A N/A N/A No Full
STANAG 1200 Long N/A N/A No Full
4529 (Coded)
STANAG 1200 Zero N/A N/A No Full
4529
(Uncoded)
STANAG 4481P 300 Long N/A N/A No Full
STANAG 4481F 75 N/A N/A N/A No Full
STANAG 4415 75 Long N/A N/A No Full
STANAG 2400 Long N/A N/A No Full
4285 (Coded)
STANAG 2400 Zero N/A N/A No Full
4285
(Uncoded)
FSKNS 75 N/A N/A Mk.= No Half
(Narrow Shift) 2762.5
Sp.=2847.5
FSKWS 600 N/A N/A Mk.=1575 No Half
(Wide Shift) Sp.=2425
FSKA 150 N/A N/A Mk.=1915 No Half
(Alternate Sp.=2085
Wide)
FSKV (Variable Shift) 300 N/A N/A 502999 No Half
(Configurable)
1070/1275
Table 3-9. Default Modem Configurations
RX AGC
Waveform Type TLC Level RX AGC TX EOM RX Limit Doppler Deacquire
MIL-STD-188-110B 4 0 OFF ON 0 Slow Fast
MIL-STD-188-110B 4 0 OFF ON 0 Slow Fast

Appendix F
STANAG 4539 4 0 OFF ON 0 Slow Fast
Table 3-10. Default Modem 39TONE Configurations

Waveform Type Preamble Diversity
39TONE Long Time/Freq
3-78
OPERATION
3.11.3.4 Miscellaneous Default Settings
Table 3-11 lists the RF-5710A default miscellaneous configurations available after the modem has been set to the
factory default settings.
Table 3-11. Miscellaneous Default Settings

Menu Option Sub Menu Default Option
Activity Detector Off
Keyline RTS/Data Keys Xmtr
Audio TX Level 0 dBm
Data Port Sync
Polarity Normal
TX Clock INT
Remote N/A
Multidrop Off
Electrical RS232
Rate 9600
Stop Bits 1
Parity None
Char Length 8
Modem ID 1
Display N/A
Backlight On
Contrast Level 3
3.11.3.5 Example of Configuring the Waveform and Data Port
Commands listed in Table 3-12 show how to use the remote control to configure the RF-5710A Modem for the
following specifications:
Waveform: Serial Tone

Over the Air Rate: 1200 bps
Modem Duplex: Full-Duplex
Interleaving Time: Short
Data Port Type: Asynchronous
Data Port Rate: 2400 bps
Data Port Character Length: 7 bits
Data Port Stop Bits: 1 bit
Data Port Parity: Even
Data Port Flow Control: XON/XOFF
Data Port Data Polarity: NORMAL (Not Inverted)
NOTE
Commands shown boldfaced are commands that are entered by

the operator using the remote control terminal. Responses from
the RF-5710A Modem are shown as normal text.
3-79
OPERATION
Table 3-12. Configuring the Waveform and Data Port

Command Response
RMT> modem type serial Modem Type Serial
RMT> modem rate 1200 Modem Rate Idle (RX)
Modem Rate 1200 bps (TX)
RMT> modem duplex full Modem Duplex FULL
RMT> modem interleaving short Modem Interleave IDLE (RX)
Modem Interleave SHORT (TX)
RMT>modem port async Modem Port ASYNC
RMT>async rate 2400 Async Rate 2400
RMT>async bits 7 Async Bits 7
RMT>async stop bits 1 Async Stop Bits 1
RMT>async parity even Async Parity EVEN
RMT>async flow xonxoff Async Flow XONXOFF
RMT>async polarity normal Async Polarity NORMAL
RMT>modem show Modem Type SERIAL
Modem Rate IDLE (RX)
Modem Rate 1200 bps (TX)
Modem Interleave IDLE (RX)
Modem Interleave SHORT (TX)
Modem Acquire On Data OFF
Modem Duplex FULL
Modem Keyline RTS
Modem Port ASYNC
Modem TX Level 0 dBm
Modem TX Audio Delay
3.11.3.6 Example of Configuring FSK 50 BPS

Commands listed in Table 3-13 show how to use the remote control to configure the RF-5710A Modem for the
following specifications:
NOTE
Since 50 bps is available only for the FSK modes with
anasynchronous DTE, the order in which commands are entered
is important. The commands must be entered such that a valid
operating mode is always selected.
Waveform: FSK Wide Shift
Over the Air Rate: 50 bps
Modem Duplex: Full-Duplex
Data Port Type: Asynchronous
Data Port Type: 50 bps
Data Port Character Length: 8 bits
Data Port Stop Bits: 1 bit
Data Port Parity: No Parity
Data Port Flow Control: CTS (Hardware Handshaking)
Data Port Polarity: NORMAL (Not Inverted)
3-80
OPERATION
NOTE
Commands shown boldfaced are commands that are entered by

the operator using the remote control terminal. Responses from
the RF-5710A Modem are shown as normal text.
Table 3-13. Configuring FSK 50 BPS

Command Response
RMT>modem type fskw Modem Type FSKWS
RMT>modem port asynchronous Modem Port ASYNC
RMT>modem rate 50 Modem Rate 50 bps
RMT>modem duplex full Modem Duplex FULL
RMT>async rate 50 Async Rate 50 bps
RMT>async bits 8 Async Bits 8
RMT>async stop 1 Async Stop Bits 1
RMT>async parity none Async Parity NONE
RMT>async flow cts Async Flow CTS
RMT>async polarity normal Async Polarity NORMAL
RMT>modem show Modem Type FSKWS
Modem Rate 50 bps
Modem Duplex FULL
Modem Mark 1575
Modem Space 2425
Modem Keyline ON
Modem Port ASYNC
Modem TX Audio Delay + 0s
RMT>async show Async rate 50 bps
Async Bits 8
Async Stop Bits 1
Async Parity NONE
Async Flow CTS
Async Polarity NORMAL
Sync TX Clock INPUT
Sync Polarity NORMAL
Sync DITT Mode OFF
NOTE
The sequence of commands is important to ensure that the

RF-5710A Modem configuration is valid at all times. Error
messages are displayed if an invalid configuration is
commanded. Proper command sequencing is also required when
switching out of 50 bps FSK modes.
As a general rule, DTE data rate and FSK channel rate should be
selected last when entering and first when leaving 50 bps FSK
operation.
3-81
OPERATION
3.12 SHOW (SH) AND HELP (HE OR ?) MENUS

Figures 3-33 through 3-41 show some examples of remote commands and the expected resulting outputs as
displayed on the screen. Commands shown boldfaced are commands that are entered by the operator using the
remote control terminal. Responses from the RF-5710A Modem are shown as normal text.
The program parameters on the HELP menus are listed with certain letters capitalized. These uppercase letters are
the minimum number of characters that must be typed in for the command keyword to be recognized by the
RF-5710A Modem. For example, the SHOW command can be executed at the remote terminal by typing the
letters SH at the RMT> prompt and pressing the RETURN key (refer to Table 3-5).
RMT> show
Key OFF
Receive IDLE
Transmit IDLE
Modem Port SYNC
Modem Type SERIAL
Modem Rate 2400bps (TX)
Modem Interleave LONG (TX)
RMT>_
5710-402a
Figure 3-33. Show Menu (Serial Mode)
3-82
OPERATION
RMT> modem show

Modem Type SERIAL
Modem Rate 2400bps (TX)
Modem Interleave LONG (TX)
Modem Acquire On Data OFF
Modem Duplex FULL
Modem Keyline RTS
Modem Port SYNC
Modem TX Audio Delay +0s
RMT>_
5710403a
Figure 3-34. RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (Serial Mode)
RMT> modem show

Modem Type FSKV
Modem Rate 300bps
Modem Duplex HALF
Modem Mark 1070
Modem Space 1275
Modem Keyline RTS
Modem Port SYNC
Offset 0 Hz
RMT>_
5710404a
Figure 3-35. RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (FSK Mode)
3-83
OPERATION
RMT> modem show

Modem Type 4285C
Modem Rate 2400bps
Modem Interleave LONG
Modem Duplex FULL
Modem Keyline RTS
Modem Port SYNC
RMT>_
5710406
Figure 3-36. RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (STANAG 4285 Mode)
RMT> modem show

Modem Type 4529C
Modem Rate 1200bps
Modem Interleave LONG
Modem Duplex FULL
Modem RX Tone Frequency 2000
Modem TX Tone Frequency 2000
Modem Keyline RTS
Modem Port SYNC
RMT>_
5710407
Figure 3-37. RF-5710A Modem Show Menu (STANAG 4529 Mode)
RMT> async show

(or
RMT> sync show)
Async Rate 9600
Async Bits 8
Async Stop Bits 1
Async Parity NONE
Async Flow CTS
Async Polarity NORMAL
Sync TX Clock OUTPUT
Sync Polarity NORMAL
RMT>_
5710408
Figure 3-38. Async and Sync Show Menu
3-84
OPERATION
RMT> help
ACtivity Activity Detector command

ACtivity help display activity commands
ASync async command
ASync HElp display async commands
AUdloopback ON/OFF
CLear clear pending fault and reset modem
FTune +//0
HElp or ? display this list
INitialize Reset modem params to active preset
MEter display fsk tune meter
MOdem modem command
MOdem HElp display modem commands
PReset display power up preset number
PReset SAve 0/1/.../199
PReset LOad 0/1/.../199
REmote display remote setup parameters
REmote HElp display remote setup commands
RESET restart modem
SHow show status
SYnc sync command
SYnc HElp display sync commands
TEST perform self test
REPORT show results of last front panel or remote TEST
VErsions report firmware revisions
ZERO reset to factory defaults
Sample command: modem show
RMT>
5710409
Figure 3-39. HELP Menu
3-85
OPERATION
RMT> modem help
Modem commands consist of the following, preceded by MOdem:

POrt ASync/SYnc
TYpe SErial/5066G/5065M/5065F/4529C/4529U/4481P/4481F/4415
4285C/4285U/FSKWs/FSKNs/FSKA/FSKV
RAte 50/75/100/150/300/600/1200/1800/2400/3200/3600/4800/6400
8000/9600/12800
INterleave LOng/SHort/ZEro/DOublelong
ACqondata OFf (ON is available for 5066G waveform only)
KEyline ON/OFf/RTs (RTS also implies Data)
DUplex HAlf/FUll
TXlevel +10/+8/+6/+4/+2/0/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/
22/24/26/28/30/32/34/36/38/40
DElay 0 19.9
RXTOnefreq 800 2400 TXTOnefreq 800 2400
MArk 50 2999 SPace 50 2999
SNr or SNR? display receive SNR
SHow show status
IDentify show Model, Mfg. and Firmware Version
WAveform 4285/4529/110B/HIgh
ELectrical RS232/RS422/RS423/MS114
ROffset set all fsk RX offset from 200/195/.../+200
TOffset set 5065 only TX offset from 200/195/.../+200
TCarrier ALways on/NOrmal TX carrier mode for 5065
HElp or ? display this list
Sample command: modem rate 600
RMT> 5710410
Figure 3-40. RF-5710A Modem Help Menu
3-86
OPERATION
RMT> remote help
The following Remote Control commands will not take effect

until either the power is cycled or the RESET command is activated.
Using the TEST command or setting any remote parameters from the
front panel will also cause the remote parameters to actually take
effect. The parameters when queried will return the last result
written by the commands whether the change has been activated or
not.
All Remote command settings will be stored immediately as GLOBAL

parameters. They are NOT stored as separate Preset information.
These features are for the purpose of automated setup of the
RF-5710A.
Remote commands consist of the following, preceded by REmote:
BIts 7/8
ELectrical RS232/RS422/RS423/RS422NT/RS485/RS485NT
HElp or ? Displays this help screen
ID 00/01/../FF The Hexadecimal multidrop modem ID
MUltidrop OFf/ON
PArity NOne/ODd/EVen
RAte 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
STopbits 1/2
Sample command: remote id f9
RMT>
Figure 3-41. Remote Help Menu
3-87
OPERATION
3-88
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 4
4.1 INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 General
This chapter covers the functional description of the circuitry in the RF-5710A Modem. Paragraph 4.2 contains
the overall functional description. Paragraph 4.3 provides the major functional description which covers the major
circuits on the Shop Replaceable Units (SRUs). Refer to Chapter 6 for Built-In Test (BIT) and troubleshooting
information.
4.2 OVERALL FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
4.2.1 General
The following paragraphs provide an overall description of how the RF-5710A Modem functions.
4.2.2 Purpose of the RF-5710A Modem
The Harris RF-5710A series of HF/LF modems are designed to operate with conventional Single Sideband
(SSB-HF) transmitters/receivers and provide reliable high-speed communications over HF radio circuits. They
are significantly enhanced versions of the industry standard RF-5710 modem and have both increased processing
power and additional memory to accommodate the latest generation of high-speed adaptively-equalized HF
waveforms.
4.2.3 Simplified Functional Level Descriptions
Radio functional level descriptions are described in the following paragraphs:
Paragraph 4.2.3.1 Transmit Processing
Paragraph 4.2.3.2 Receive Processing
For a more detailed functional description, refer to Paragraph 4.3.

4.2.3.1 Transmit Processing
See Figure 4-1. Data from the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) is input to the RF-5710A Modem Control
Processor (MCP) through level conversion circuitry which can be configured for commonly used electrical
interface standards. The MCP performs data buffering, clock recovery, clock correction, and asynchronous data
conversion. It passes the formatted data to the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) circuit. The DSP processors
generate the selected waveform and modulate it with the transmit data. The digital information is sent to a
digital-to-analog converter which converts it to an analog audio signal, which is amplified and output to the HF
radio transmitter through an audio transformer. The MCP circuit also activates the keylines to the transmitter and
provides control functions for the front panel and remote port.
4.2.3.2 Receive Processing
See Figure 4-1. The signal output from the HF receiver is input to the modem through an audio transformer and
fed to an analog-to-digital converter. The DSP processors demodulate the samples from the analog-to-digital
converter and extract the data which is passed to the MCP processor. The MCP performs data buffering, clock
correction, and serial data formatting. The serial data is output to the DTE through level conversion circuitry
which can be configured for commonly used electrical interface standards.
4-1
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING CORE

XMT AUDIO
XFORMER
512 k
DSP AIC
PRIMARY RADIO
SRAM INTERFACE, J4
RCV AUDIO
XFORMER
XMT AUDIO
XFORMER
512 k
DSP AIC
SECONDARY RADIO
SRAM INTERFACE, J5
RCV AUDIO
XFORMER
REF. OSC
9.216 MHz
KEYLINE
MODEM CONTROL INTERFACE
PROCESSOR (MCP)
16 M ETHERNET ETHERNET
DRAM INTERFACE INTERFACE, J1
8M HOST DTE DTE

FLASH PROCESSOR INTERFACE INTERFACE, J2
1M REMOTE REMOTE
FLASH (NV) INTERFACE INTERFACE, J3
LCD
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
5710A-2001
Figure 4-1. Modem Functional Block Diagram
4-2
4.3 MAJOR FUNCTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION

The major function level description is provided in the following paragraphs.
4.3.1 Power Supply
The power supply accepts input voltages in the range of 85 Vac 264 Vac, with an input frequency range of
47 Hz 440 Hz, with no internal strapping or voltage selection required. The input power is routed from the rear
panel AC input filter module to the front panel power switch, then to the power supply input connector. The
power supply produces DC output voltages of +5V, 12V, and +12V, which power A1 HF Modem Printed Wiring
Board (PWB) Assembly.
4.3.2 Front Panel Assembly
A5 Front Panel Assembly consists of a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) module and four push-button switches
which are connected to A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly by a flexible ribbon cable. The LCD module displays two
rows of 20 characters each. Key presses on the push-buttons are detected by the MCP on A1 HF Modem PWB
Assembly, which processes the front panel inputs and sends menu and status information to the front panel
display.
4.3.3 HF Modem Circuit Board Assembly
A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly consists of the following sections of circuitry.
4.3.3.1 RF-5710A Modem Control Processor (MCP) Circuit
The MCP circuit consists of a Power PCt microprocessor, 8 Mbytes of Flash memory for program code,
16 Mbytes of Random Access Memory (RAM), and 1 Mbyte of Flash memory for non-volatile storage of the
RF-5710A Modem operating parameters. The program code is downloaded from the Flash memory into the fast
random access memory of the DSP processors upon power-on or reset. The MCP runs from a master oscillator
which has a frequency of 9.216 MHz. The MCP circuit controls all RF-5710A Modem interfaces, including the
front panel display and push-button interface, remote control interface, and the data terminal interface. In
addition, it performs initial processing of transmit data and final processing of receive data as required by the
selected waveform. Data is passed between the MCP and DSP circuits via a common memory interface.
4.3.3.2 DSP Circuit
The DSP circuit consists of a two TMS320C549 digital signal processors, each with 512 kbytes of fast Random
Access Memory (SRAM). The DSP processors communicate with two Analog Interface Chips (AICs) which
provide analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion functions for the primary and secondary radio
interfaces. The DSP circuit performs all waveform generation, modulation, and demodulation functions.
4.3.3.3 HF Radio Interface
The RF-5710A Modem is provided with two radio interface ports; a primary port which is normally used to
connect the HF radio and a secondary port which is intended to support future modem capabilities that include
diversity reception and Independent Sideband (ISB) operation.
Each port is equipped with transformer coupled balanced audio inputs and outputs which are connected to the
AICs in the DSP circuit. The transmit audio levels are controlled by the MCP and can be adjusted from 40 dBm
to +10 dBm from the front panel controls or the remote control port. The receive audio signals are buffered and
fed to multiplying analog-to-digital converters, which are used to provide Automatic Gain Control (AGC). The
receive audio inputs do not require adjustment and can accommodate signals in the range 35 dBm to +10 dBm.
A programmable transmit audio delay is provided for transmitters which are slow tuning or have long
transmit-receive changeover times. This feature delays the output of the transmit audio for a preset period after
the transmitter keyline has been asserted. It can be set from 0 to 15.0 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds from
either the front panel controls or the remote control interface.
4-3
Adjusting this setting will also delay the assertion of the RF-5710A Modem DTE port Clear-to-Send (CTS) signal
in response to the Request-to-Send (RTS) signal from the DTE equipment. Any data sent before CTS is asserted
will be ignored.
Figure 4-2 is the Keyline Delay Timing Diagram and shows the RF-5710A DTE data port handshaking signals in
relation to the transmitted audio signal. Table 4-1 lists the minimum timing diagram values.
RTS
CTS tKD
tRC
KEYLINE
tRK
tCA
AUDIO
tKA
tRA
tRK DELAY BETWEEN ASSERTION OF RTS AND KEYLINE ASSERTION

tRC RTS DEBOUNCE PERIOD
tKD PROGRAMMABLE KEYLINE DELAY AMOUNT
tCA SYSTEM DELAY BETWEEN ASSERTION OF CTS AND START OF TX AUDIO
tRA TOTAL DELAY TIME BETWEEN ASSERTION OF RTS AND THE START OF THE TX AUDIO
tKA DELAY BETWEEN THE ASSERTION OF THE KEYLINE AND THE START OF THE TX AUDIO
RF-5710-500
Figure 4-2. Keyline Delay Timing Diagram
Table 4-1. Minimum Timing Diagram Values

Value Minimum
tRK 1 mS
tRC 20 mS
tKD Variable
tCA 4 mS
tRA = tRC + tKD + tCA 24 mS + tKD
tKA = tRA tRK 23 mS + tKD
4-4
4.3.3.4 Data Terminal Interface

Transmit data, receive data, synchronous clocks, and the RTS/CTS handshaking signals are provided on DTE
connector J2. These signals are connected to the MCP through level conversion circuitry which can be configured
for the following commonly used electrical interface standards:
RS-232D
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
The DTE interface can be configured for synchronous or asynchronous operation. The functions of the signals on
the DTE port are described below.
The RF-5710A Modem initiates transmission in response to a RTS signal from the DTE. If the DTE does not
support RTS signaling, an external means of generating an RTS signal must be provided. In response to the RTS
signal, the modem provides a CTS signal when it is ready to accept data for transmission. Any data sent prior by
the DTE prior to CTS being asserted is ignored. The RF-5710A Modem continues to transmit data until the RTS
line is dropped by the DTE indicating the end of the data. A short time later, the RF-5710A Modem also drops its
CTS line to the DTE. When the DTE drops the RTS line, it should not be reasserted until the RF-5710A Modem
drops its CTS line to the DTE. The DTE should drop the RTS line between messages to ensure that a preamble is
sent at the beginning of each new message.
The RF-5710A Modem provides a Carrier Detect (CD) signal to the DTE whenever an incoming signal is
detected.
In the synchronous modes of operation, the transmit and receive data clocks are generally provided by the
RF-5710A Modem to the DTE. However, the source of the transmit clock can be set by the user; the RF-5710A
Modem can either provide the clock to the DTE or accept it from the DTE. An external clock should be supplied
continuously to the modem since an interruption will cause the modem to indicate a fault.
In the asynchronous modes of operation, external clocks are not used and the sending and receiving DTEs need
not be set at the same data rate. However, the character length, parity, and number of stop bits must be identical
between the transmitting and receiving DTEs and RF-5710A Modems. Flow control is provided in case the DTE
rate exceeds the over-the-air rate. It can be set to use either the CTS signal or the XON/XOFF characters (for 7
and 8-bit character lengths). The CTS signal is dropped when the modem can no longer accept data from the DTE
and it is reasserted when the RF-5710A Modem is ready to accept more data.
If the RF-5710A Modem is commanded to change mode while a transmission is in progress, the RF-5710A
Modem drops the CTS signal and terminates the transmission, which may involve sending an End-Of-Message
(EOM) sequence and any unsent data in the interleaver and convolutional encoder. Once all the data is
transmitted, the RF-5710A Modem automatically changes mode, reasserts the CTS signal and starts a new
transmission using the new mode.
4-5
4.3.3.5 Remote Control Interface

Serial commands from a remote control terminal or remote control computer are input to the RF-5710A Modem
through Remote Port J3. The transmit and receive data signals from the remote port are connected to the MCP
through level conversion circuitry which can be configured for the commonly used electrical interface standards.
The remote port can also be configured for point-to-point or multidrop operation. In the multidrop mode, the
control computer can address multiple modems connected to the same remote control bus. The remote port can be
set to the following electrical interface standards:
4.3.3.5.1 Applicable Documents
The following documents specify the capabilities and limitations of the different electrical interfaces, allowing the
selection of the best interface for the users application.
NOTE
The operator is strongly recommended to read all of the
following documents. This will provide the user with a complete
understanding necessary for optimal RF-5710A Modem
performance.
NATO STANAG 5066 Profile for Maritime High Frequency (HF) Radio Data Communications, Version
1.0. Annex D: Interface between Data Transfer Dublayer and Communications Equipment.
EIA RS-232E Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication Equipment
Employing Serial Binary Data.
EIA RS-242
MIL-STD-188-114A
MIL-STD-188C
EIA RS-422 Interface (Provides MIL-STD-188C polarities and slew rates recommended in
MIL-STD-114A.)
EIA RS-243
EIA RS-485
4.3.3.5.2 Electrical (RS-232, RS-422, RS-422-NT, RS-423, RS-485, RS-485-NT)
The electrical characteristics of the remote port can be selected from the following electrical standards:
RS-232D
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
RS-485
In the RS-485 mode, the interface operates in a half-duplex mode and only two wires are needed to support both
transmit and receive data. The modem automatically senses the direction of the data and operates the interface
accordingly.
In multidrop mode, each RF-5710A Modem will turn on TX terminations and drivers only when transmitting a
response. Otherwise, the TX termination and drivers are disabled. The delay from the time the RF-5710A Modem
completes the transmission of its response, to the time when the termination and drivers are disabled, is 500 ms.
4-6
4.3.3.5.3 Firmware Upgrade Capability

The remote port can also be used to download new firmware from a personal computer using the Xmodem
protocol. Following a data integrity check, the new firmware is loaded into the MCP flash memory to either
upgrade the existing waveforms or to add new waveforms.
4.3.4 Waveform Descriptions
This section provides short descriptions of each of the waveforms supported by the RF-5710A series modems.
Complete descriptions can be found in the applicable standards documents.
Typical signal-to-noise ratio requirements for the different data rates and modes are listed in Table 1-4. The
signal-to-noise ratio is referred to a 3 kHz bandwidth. The International Radio Consultative Committee,
International Telecommunications Union (ITU), Geneva (CCIR) Poor channel is representative of a type of
skywave communications channel and the Gaussian channel is representative of short range surface wave
communications. This table should only be used as a guide because HF channel conditions vary considerably and
the actual error rate performance can also be dependent on a number of other factors. Given these signal-to-noise
ratio requirements, some examples of the performance that can be expected from different HF circuits are listed
below:
A well-engineered 1 kW HF link operating at the optimum frequency over distances of up to 500 km can
produce signal-to-noise ratios in the order of 30 dB during the middle of the day and be capable of
supporting data rates as high as 9600 bps. Lower transmit powers can also support 9600 bps, depending
on channel conditions.
A well-engineered 1 kW surface wave link between two ships can provide signal-to-noise ratios greater
than 30 dB out to ranges of 400 km and be capable of supporting data rates as high as 9600 bps. Lower
transmit powers can also support 9600 bps, depending on channel conditions.
Clearly readable SSB voice communications require signal-to-noise ratios of at least 13 dB. Circuits
providing this are also likely to be able to support data rates up to 2400 bps.
Poor quality SSB voice communications are possible at signal-to-noise ratios as low as 6 dB. Under these
circumstances, data communications may be possible at rates as high as 600 bps.
Data rates of 300 bps and below can be used on HF circuits which are not useable for SSB voice.
The performance of the 75 bps STANAG 4415 mode rivals that of a skilled morse-code operator.
4.3.4.1 STANAG 5065 Waveform
The STANAG 5065 waveform has been provided for high speed LF waveform applications. The 5065 mode
provides both FSK and MSK waveform. Both utilize a center frequency of 975 Hz and a shift frequency of 42.5
Hz. The FSK waveform requires 235 Hz bandwidth and operates at 75 bps. MSK requires 360 Hz and operates at
300 bps. For this waveform the modem provides receive and transmit offset adjustments 200 Hz in 5 Hz
increments.
4.3.4.2 STANAG 5066, Annex G Waveform
The STANAG 5066, Annex G waveforms provide the highest possible data rates over conventional 3kHz HF
channels. A single 1800 Hz sub-carrier is modulated at a constant rate of 2400 symbols per second. The type of
modulation varies from 64-QAM to 4-PSK according to the data rate selected. Known data symbols are
periodically inserted in the transmitted signal to allow for adaptive channel equalization at the receiver.
Convolutional coding (FEC) and Viterbi decoding are combined with interleaving to enhance the performance of
the RF-5710A Modem on fading HF channels. Data rates from 3200 bps to 9600 bps are supported together with
long, double-long, short, and zero interleaving options. An additional 12,800 bps uncoded waveform is supported
for line-of-sight applications. Automatic detection of the data rate and interleaver setting are provided in the
receive mode.
4-7
4.3.4.3 MIL-STD-188-110B Serial Tone Waveform

The MIL-STD-188-110B serial tone waveform is a good general purpose, high-speed HF waveform. The data rate
can be set from 75 bps to 2400 bps and it provides excellent performance on a wide range of HF channels. The
interleaving depth can be set to zero, short, or long. It also supports a 4800 bps uncoded mode for use on very
good channels. It uses Phase Shift Keying (PSK) modulation of a single 1800 Hz sub-carrier at a constant rate of
2400 symbols per second. The modulation order varies from 2-ary to 8-ary according to the data rate selected.
Known data symbols are periodically inserted in the transmitted signal to allow for adaptive channel equalization
at the receiver. Convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding are combined with block interleaving to enhance the
performance on fading HF channels. Automatic data rate and interleaver setting detection are provided in receive
mode. The waveform is optimized for point-to-point applications and a robust synchronization preamble is
provided at the beginning of each transmission.
4.3.4.4 MIL-STD-188-110B Mode (110B Mode)
The 110B Mode waveform provides the highest possible data rates over conventional SSB channels. A single
1800 Hz sub-carrier is modulated at a constant rate of 2400 symbols per second. The type of modulation varies
from 64-QAM to 2-PSK according to the data rate selected. Known data symbols are periodically inserted in the
transmitted signal to allow for adaptive channel equalization at the receiver. Convolutional coding (FEC) and
Viterbi decoding are combined with interleaving to enhance the performance of the RF-5710A Modem on fading
HF channels. Data rates from 75 bps to 9600 bps are supported together with zero (Z) ultra short (US), very short
(VS), short (S), medium (M), long (L), and very long (VL) interleaving options. An additional 4800 and 12,800
bps uncoded waveforms are supported for line-of-sight applications. Automatic detection of the data rate and
interleaver setting are provided in the receive mode.
4.3.4.5 STANAG 4539 Annex B Section 4 Waveform
The STANAG 4539 Annex B Section 4 waveform provides the highest possible data rates over conventional ISB
channels. A single 1800 Hz sub-carrier is modulated at a constant rate of 2400 symbols per second. The type of
modulation varies from 64-QAM to 4-PSK according to the data rate selected. Known data symbols are
periodically inserted in the transmitted signal to allow for adaptive channel equalization at the receiver.
Convolutional coding (FEC) and Viterbi decoding are combined with interleaving to enhance the performance of
the RF-5710A Modem on fading HF channels. Data rates from 9600 bps to 19,200 bps are supported together
with ultra short (US), very short (VS), short (S), medium (M), long (L), and very long (VL) interleaving options.
An additional 12,800 bps uncoded waveform is supported for line-of-sight applications. Automatic detection of
the data rate and interleaver setting are provided in the receive mode.
4.3.4.6 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F High Data Rate Mode (110B-F Mode)
The 110B-F Mode waveform provides the highest possible data rates over conventional ISB channels. Two 1800
Hz sub-carriers are modulated at a constant rate of 2400 symbols per second. The type of modulation varies from
64-QAM to 4-PSK according to the data rate selected. Known data symbols are periodically inserted in the
transmitted signal to allow for adaptive channel equalization at the receiver. Convolutional coding (FEC) and
Viterbi decoding are combined with interleaving to enhance the performance of the RF-5710A Modem on fading
HF channels. Data rates from 9600 bps to 19,200 bps are supported together with ultra short (US), very short
(VS), short (S), medium (M), long (L), and very long (VL) interleaving options. Automatic detection of the data
rate and interleaver setting are provided in the receive mode.
4-8
4.3.4.7 MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39TONE Waveform

The US MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix B 39TONE waveform is a good general purpose, high speed HF
waveform. The data rate can be set from 75 bps to 2400 bps and it provides good performance for a wide range of
HF channels. The interleaving depth can be set to alternate-short, alternate-long, short and long. It uses a 4-DPSK
(differential PSK) modulation on each of the 39 tones. Reed-Solomon coding and Soft-Decision Reed-Solomon
Decoding are combined with block interleaving to enhance the performance on fading HF channels. The
waveform is optimized for point-to-point applications and a robust synchronization is provided at the beginning
of each transmission.
The STANAG 4285 waveform is similar to the MIL-STD-188-110B serial tone waveform. It provides coded data
rates from 75 bps to 2400 bps and uncoded data rates from 1200 bps to 3600 bps. The principal differences are the
use of a convolutional interleaver instead of a block interleaver, the format of the synchronization sequences, and
the ratio of known to unknown data symbols. Automatic detection of the data rate and the interleave factor of
incoming transmissions is not provided by this waveform. The STANAG 4285 waveform is optimized for
broadcast applications because of its continuous synchronization capability.
The STANAG 4529 waveform has an identical format to the STANAG 4285 waveform, but it uses a reduced
bandwidth of 1240 Hz. This allows it to be used where the existing frequency assignments cannot support the
3 kHz bandwidth required for the STANAG 4285 waveform. It provides coded data rates from 75 bps to 1200 bps
and uncoded data rates from 600 bps to 1800 bps. It uses PSK modulation of a single sub-carrier tone at a rate of
1200 symbols per second. The RF-5710A Modem allows the sub-carrier frequency to be selected between 800 Hz
and 2400 Hz (in 50 Hz steps).
4.3.4.10 STANAG 4415 NATO Robust Waveform
The STANAG 4415 NATO robust waveform is the same as the MIL-STD-188-110B 75 bps waveform. However,
the demodulation process is greatly enhanced to accommodate multipath delay spreads greater than 10 ms and
Doppler spread (fade rate) greater than 50 Hz. The waveform utilizes a 1/2 rate convolutional code coupled with
4-ary Orthogonal Walsh modulation. The transmitted signal occupies a bandwidth of 3kHz.
4.3.4.11 STANAG 4481-P AND -F Waveforms
The STANAG 4481 waveforms were added to the RF-5710A Modem to simplify operator selection of Naval
BRASS broadcast waveforms. The STANAG 4481-P waveform has an identical format to the 300 bps long
interleaver STANAG 4285 waveform. The STANAG 4481-F waveform has an identical format to the 75 bps
Wide Shift FSK mode.
4.3.4.12 Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) Waveform
The FSK mode is provided for compatibility with older modems. User selection of the mark/space frequencies
over the range of 50 Hz to 2999 Hz (1 Hz resolution) is provided.
4.3.5 Radio Interface Ports
The RF-5710A Modem is compatible with most HF-SSB radio equipment. The most important radio equipment
requirements are listed in Table 4-2.
The RF-5710A Modem is provided with two radio interface ports; a primary port which is normally used to
connect the radio, and a secondary port which is intended to support future modem capabilities that include
diversity reception and Independent Sideband (ISB) transmission.
4-9
Each port provides a 600-ohm balanced transmit audio output and a 600-ohm balanced receive audio input. The
transmit output level can be adjusted from 40 dBm to +10 dBm through the use of the front panel controls or the
remote control port. The receive audio input does not require adjustment and can accommodate signals in the
range 30 dBm to +10 dBm.
The primary radio interface port also provides two keyline signals to cause the radio to switch from receive to
transmit. One keyline is an open collector transistor driver and the other is an isolated bi-directional contact
closure. The appropriate keyline for the radio should be used. The keylines are enabled as a result of the
RF-5710A Modem receiving a Request-to-Send (RTS) signal from the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).
Table 4-2. Radio Equipment Requirements
Parameter Requirement
Envelope Delay Distortion Less than 1 millisecond total for transmitter and receiver between 675 Hz
and 2812 Hz.
Amplitude Distortion Amplitude ripple between 300 Hz and 3000 Hz should not exceed 2 dB.
Intermodulation Distortion Third-order intermodulation distortion products should be at least 35 dB
below Peak Envelope Power (PEP).
Synthesizer Phase Noise RMS phase jitter should not exceed 2.5 degrees when averaged over 22
millisecond periods.
Synthesizer Stability Better than 1 part in 106.
Receiver Automatic Gain Control Decay time should be approximately 500 milliseconds, with the exception
(AGC) of the STANAG 5066, Annex G waveforms which require decay times of
approximately 2 seconds.
4.3.5.1 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) Port

The RF-5710A series modems are designed to operate with a wide variety of DTE. The DTE port can be set to
the following electrical standards:
RS-232D
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
In addition, the RF-5710A Modem can be configured for synchronous or asynchronous operation. The functions
of the signals on the DTE port are described below.
The RF-5710A Modem initiates transmission in response to an RTS signal from the DTE. If the DTE does not
support RTS signaling, an external means of generating an RTS signal must be provided. In response to the RTS
signal, the RF-5710A Modem provides a Clear-to-Send (CTS) signal when it is ready to accept data for
transmission. Any data sent by the DTE prior to CTS being asserted is ignored. The RF-5710A Modem continues
to transmit data until the RTS line is dropped by the DTE indicating the end of the data. A short time later, the
RF-5710A Modem also drops its CTS line to the DTE. When the DTE drops the RTS line, it should not be
reasserted until the RF-5710A Modem drops its CTS line to the DTE. The DTE should drop the RTS line between
messages to ensure that a preamble is sent at the beginning of each new message.
4-10
The RF-5710A Modem provides a Carrier Detect (CD) signal to the DTE whenever the modem has data for the
DTE.
In the synchronous modes of operation, the transmit and receive data clocks are generally provided by the
RF-5710A Modem to the DTE. However, the source of the transmit clock can be set by the user; the modem can
either provide the clock to the DTE or accept it from the DTE. An external clock should be supplied continuously
to the RF-5710A Modem since an interruption will cause the modem to indicate a fault.
NOTE
The receiver clock is always provided by the modem.
In the asynchronous modes of operation, external clocks are not used and the sending and receiving DTEs need
not be set to the same data rate. However, the character length, parity, and number of stop bits must be identical
between the transmitting and receiving DTEs and RF-5710A Modems. Flow control is provided in case the DTE
rate exceeds the over-the-air rate. It can be set to use either the CTS signal or the XON/XOFF characters (for 7
and 8-bit character lengths). The CTS signal is dropped when the RF-5710A Modem can no longer accept data
from the DTE and it is reasserted when the RF-5710A Modem is ready to accept more data.
4.3.5.2 Remote Control Port
The RF-5710A Modem can be controlled from an ASCII terminal or control computer connected to the modem
remote control port. The remote control port can be configured for point-to-point or multidrop operation. In
the multidrop mode, the control computer can address multiple modems connected to the same remote control
bus. The Remote Control Port can be set to the following electrical standards:
RS-232D
RS-422 balanced
RS-423 unbalanced
RS-485
The remote control protocol is described in detail in Paragraph 4.3.3.5. With the exception of the remote port
interface parameters, any RF-5710A Modem operating parameter that can be selected from the front panel can be
controlled from the remote control port. The RF-5710A Modem is capable of reporting current operational and
front-panel status in response to polls from the remote control unit.
4-11
4-12
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 5
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information required to perform scheduled maintenance procedures on the RF-5710A
Modem.
5.1.1 Scheduled Maintenance Procedures
The performance of the RF-5710A Modem is dependent on equipment that performs optimally. Therefore,
preventive maintenance is of primary importance, in order to avoid equipment failures.
Preventive maintenance is the systematic, scheduled care and inspection of equipment to prevent equipment
failure and to reduce downtime.
Preventive maintenance consists of keeping the equipment clean, dry, and dust-free.
Use a soft brush, a moist sponge and a clean cloth to keep equipment clean.
Table 5-1 contains the checks and services that should be performed either on a daily basis when the equipment is
in use or on a weekly basis when the equipment is in a standby condition. Table 5-2 contains the checks and
services that should be performed on a weekly basis.
Table 5-1. Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure
1 Operation Perform self-test.
Table 5-2. Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure
1 Cables and Connectors Visually inspect for corrosion or damage.
5-1
5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 INTRODUCTION
6.1.1 General
This chapter provides troubleshooting data necessary for fault isolation to the Shop Replaceable Unit (SRU) level.
6.1.2 Scope of this Chapter
See Figure 6-1. The procedures presented in this chapter assume that the RF-5710A Modem is faulty. The
maintenance turn-on procedure is used to find a fault indication with the unit. If there is a non-Built-In Test
(non-BIT) fault, the maintainer will use the non-BIT troubleshooting procedures. If there is a BIT fault, the
maintainer will use the BIT troubleshooting procedure. If the problem is not corrected using these procedures, the
troubleshooting index is to be used based on the functional area of the fault. The unit is beyond Level III repair if
the faulty circuit cannot be determined by either of these methods. If the problem is found and corrected, the unit
is returned to operational readiness.
START
MAINTENANCE TURN-ON
PROCEDURE
(PARAGRAPH 6.2.3)
NON-BIT
BIT TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
(PARAGRAPH 6.2.5)
(PARAGRAPH 6.2.4)
YES PROBLEM NO
CORRECTED
RETURN UNIT TO UNIT BEYOND LEVEL III

OPERATIONAL READINESS REPAIR
5710A-006
Figure 6-1. Troubleshooting Process Used in this Chapter
6-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

6.2.1 General
Troubleshooting begins with performing the maintenance turn-on procedure. The maintenance turn-on procedure
references the non-BIT and BIT troubleshooting procedures. Refer to Paragraph 6.2.3.
6.2.2 Run-Time Faults
Run-time faults may occur during normal operation of the Unit Under Test (UUT). In these cases, a fault message
will be displayed on the front panel Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). When this occurs, run BIT according to the
procedure in Paragraph 6.2.3. For more information on run-time (non-BIT) faults, refer to Paragraph 6.2.4.
6.2.3 Maintenance Turn-On Procedure
Perform the following procedure to power up the RF-5710A Modem UUT and execute BIT:
a. Turn the power switch to the ON position: INITIALIZING: BITE IN PROGRESS will appear in the
display. This indicates that the RF-5710A Modem is conducting a self-test with the Built-in Test
Equipment (BITE) program.
b. After several seconds, the display will show the current waveform operating parameters.
c. Push the FIELD button once. The keyword for the last field used will begin flashing. Push the FIELD
button until the waveform type is flashing in the upper left corner of the display.
d. Push one of the SCROLL buttons. Continue pushing the button until the word TEST appears in the
flashing display.
e. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem self-test is the default choice and the word MODEM
will be flashing in the display, with RUN SELF TEST on the second line.
f. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem will change to display SELF TEST RUNNING on the
second line.
g. After about ten seconds, if RF-5710A Modem self-test is successful, the message MODEM SELF TEST
PASSED will display briefly. The RF-5710A Modem will then return to the RF-5710A Modem self-test
screen. If the RF-5710A Modem self-test is not successful, a fault message will display.
h. To return to the operating mode, push the FIELD button until the keyword TEST is flashing. Use the
SCROLL buttons to select desired waveform operating mode. Push the ENTER button.
If the UUT does not pass BIT, proceed to Paragraph 6.2.5. If the UUT cannot run BIT, proceed to Paragraph
6.2.4.
6.2.4 Non-BIT Fault Isolation
Table 6-1 is a list of the non-BIT fault symptoms. Next to the symptom observed is a reference to the
recommended action that should be taken. When the recommended action is to remove and replace assemblies,
replace the assemblies one at a time in the order listed, testing the UUT after replacing each assembly. Table 7-1
references the assembly removal and replacement procedures.
When the recommended action is to perform a Troubleshooting Analysis Procedure (TAP), proceed to the
specified TAP. Refer to Paragraph 6.2.6 for more TAP information.
6-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2.4.1 Loopback Test

A confidence check of the RF-5710A Modem and the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) interface can be
performed by the audio loopback test. The audio loopback test internally loops the RF-5710A Modems transmit
analog signal to the receive input and disconnects both signals from the radio interface.
Perform the following procedure to use the audio loopback option:
a. Push the FIELD button until the keyword for the waveform type (in the upper left corner of the display)
is flashing.
b. Push either SCROLL button. Continue pushing the button until the word TEST appears in the flashing
display.
c. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem self-test is the default choice and the word MODEM
will be flashing in the display.
d. Push either SCROLL button until the words Aud Loopbck and Intern Loopbck appear in the
flashing display.
e. Push the ENTER button. The RF-5710A Modem will display with the words Loopback off flashing in
the display.
f. To start audio loopback, push either SCROLL button. The words Loopback on will flash in the
display. Push the ENTER button. The words Loopback on will stop flashing. At this point, the
RF-5710A Modem is in Loopback mode.
g. To stop sending the test message, push the FIELD button. The words Loopback on will flash in the
display. Push either SCROLL button. The words Loopback off will be flashing in the display. Push the
ENTER button. The words Loopback off will stop flashing.
h. To resume audio loopback, push the FIELD button. The words Loopback off will be flashing in the
display. Repeat step f.
i. To return to the operating mode, stop audio loopback by performing step g. Push the FIELD button until
the keyword TEST is flashing. Use the SCROLL buttons to select desired waveform operating mode.
Push the ENTER button.
Refer to Table 6-1 if the loopback test does not function correctly.
6-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 6-1. Non-BIT Fault Symptoms

Symptom Observed Action
No display on front panel LCD. Proceed to TAP-1.
RF-5710A Modem fails internal loopback test described in Paragraph Perform the following procedure:
6.2.4.1. Failed internal loopback test is identified by either of the Cycle RF-5710A Modem
following symptoms: power OFF then ON.
RF-5710A Modems TX mode goes active (KEY) but the RX
mode remains IDLE. Confirm that RF-5710A
Modem and DTE are both
RF-5710A Modems TX mode does not go active and RX configured correctly, and that
mode also remains IDLE. all cables are connected.
If the above steps do not correct

the problem, remove and
replace A1 HF Modem Printed
Wiring Board (PWB)
Assembly.
One of the following messages displayed on RF-5710A Modem Perform the following procedure:
LCD: Cycle RF-5710A Modem
LOSS OF EXTERNAL DTE CLOCK power OFF then ON.
EXTERNAL DTE FAST CLOCK FAULT Confirm that RF-5710A

Modem and DTE are both
EXTERNAL DTE SLOW CLOCK FAULT configured correctly, and that
all cables are connected.
Use an oscilloscope to confirm

that the DTE is providing a
transmit clock signal at J2 pin
24.
If the frequency accuracy of the

clock signal from the DTE is
uncertain, remove and replace
the DTE.
If the above steps do not correct

the problem, remove and
replace A1 HF Modem PWB
Assembly.
6-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2.5 BIT Fault Isolation

BIT is executed from the front panel of the UUT, or from an optional terminal connected to the UUT. If a problem
is located, a fault code is displayed on the front panel LCD.
When a fault has occurred, the front panel will display the message: A FAULT OCCURRED:. One of three
options can be selected using the SCROLL and ENTER buttons:
RESET MODEM Selecting this causes the RF-5710A Modem to reset and go through its power up
sequence, then attempt to resume normal operation.
IGNORE FAULT Selecting this causes the RF-5710A Modem to return to its previous operating
condition and attempt to resume normal operation.
NOTE
The Ignore Fault option is not recommended and should only be
selected if the RF-5710A Modem is currently receiving data.
DISPLAY FAULT MESSAGE Selecting this will display the fault message associated with the fault.
If resetting the RF-5710A Modem does not correct the problem, perform the following procedure:
a. Confirm that the RF-5710A Modem and all attached equipment is correctly configured.
b. Remove and replace A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly. Refer to Paragraph 7.4.1.
NOTE
A2 Power Supply Assembly and A3 AC Input Filter Assembly
are assumed good if the RF-5710A Modem powers on. If the
RF-5710A Modem displays a BIT fault on the LCD, then A5
Front Panel Assembly is assumed good. Therefore, A1 HF
Modem PWB Assembly is the most likely cause of the fault.
6.2.6 Troubleshooting Analysis Procedures (TAPs)

TAPs are provided to help the maintainer isolate faults using procedures other than simple assembly swapping.
Each TAP begins with a simple description of the fault or symptom.
When applicable, begin by performing the listed initial checks. These are checks that can be performed without
the use of tools or test equipment. If the initial checks do not solve the problem, continue by performing the
procedure itself. Table 7-1 references the assembly removal and replacement procedures.
6-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAP-1: NO DISPLAY ON FRONT PANEL A

LCD Using a DMM, check for +5 Vdc at A5P1 pin 25.
Is the voltage correct?
When RF-5710A Modem power switch is in the ON position, nothing
is displayed on RF-5710A Modem front panel LCD. Y N
Perform a continuity check on W1 cable. If W1 is bad,
INITIAL CHECKS remove and replace W1. If W1 is good, remove and
replace A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly. Return UUT
S Ensure that RF-5710A Modem is plugged into a good AC to operational readiness, then test UUT by performing
power source. Maintenance Turn-On Procedure. Refer to
Paragraph 6.2.3.
PROCEDURE Connect a remote terminal to the RF-5710A Modem. Power the
modem OFF then ON.
WARNING
NOTE
The following tests are performed with power ap-
The remote terminal settings must match the
plied to the UUT. Voltages hazardous to human
RF-5710A Modems remote port settings for prop-
life are present during these procedures.
er operation. For more information on remote port
CAUTION configuration, see Figure 3-32.
Some of the RF-5710A Modem assemblies can be Is RF-5710A Modem text displayed on the terminal?
damaged by static discharge. Failure to take
proper ESD precautions may damage these as- Y N
semblies. Remove and replace A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly.
Using a Digital Multimeter (DMM), confirm that there are correct Return UUT to operational readiness, then test UUT
DC voltages at A2 Power Supply Assembly, J2 connector. See by performing Maintenance Turn-On Procedure.
Figure 6-2, the RF-5710A Modem Interconnect Schematic Refer to Paragraph 6.2.3.
Diagram, for pinout and voltage information. Remove and replace A5 Front Panel Assembly. Return UUT to
Are the DC voltages on A2J2 correct? operational readiness, then test UUT by performing
Maintenance Turn-On Procedure. Refer to Paragraph 6.2.3.
Y N
Using a DMM, confirm that there are correct AC
voltages at A5W1P1.
Are the AC voltages on A5W1P1 correct?
Y N
Using a DMM, confirm that there are
correct AC voltages at the output of A3 AC
Input Filter Assembly.
Are the AC voltages at A3 AC Input Filter
Assembly output correct?
Y N
Check external fuse. If fuse is
bad, replace fuse. If fuse is good,
remove and replace A3 AC Input
Filter Assembly. Return UUT to
operational readiness, then test
UUT by performing Maintenance
Turn-on Procedure. Refer to
Paragraph 6.2.3.
Remove and replace A5 Front Panel
Assembly. Return UUT to operational
readiness, then test UUT by performing
Maintenance Turn-On Procedure. Refer to
Paragraph 6.2.3.
Check internal fuse. If fuse is bad, replace fuse. If fuse
is good, remove and replace A2 Power Supply
Assembly. Return UUT to operational readiness, then
test UUT by performing Maintenance Turn-On
Procedure. Refer to Paragraph 6.2.3.
A
6-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING SUPPORT DATA

6.3.1 Protective Device Index
For maintenance replaceable fuse locations, see F1 and F2 on Figure 8-1. For fuse values, refer to Table 8-3. For
fuse removal and replacement procedures, refer to Paragraphs 7.4.5 and 7.4.6.
6.3.2 Relay and Lamp Indexes
Since there are no maintainer-replaceable relays or lamps in the RF-5710A Modem, relay and lamp indexes are
not provided.
6.4 CHASSIS CONNECTOR PINOUT DATA
For RF-5710A Modem rear panel connector pinouts, refer to Paragraphs 2.7 and 2.8.
6-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
J1
ETHERNET J13
J2
1 CHASSIS GND TO
2 TXD + A
3 RXD + SHEET 2
4 RTS +
5 CTS +
6 DSR +
7 SIG GND
8 CD +
9 RXC J11 P1
10 CD
11 N/C B
12 TXC
13 CTS TO SHEET 2
14 TXD
15 TXC +
16 RXD
17 RXC +
18 N/C
19 RTS J10 P1
20 N/C
21 N/C A1
22 DSR
23 N/C
24 EXTXCLK +
25 EXTXCLK 12004200001
J3
1 CHASSIS GND
2 TXD +
3 RXD +
4
5
6
7 SIG GND TO
8 C
9 SHEET 2
TO 10
11
REAR 12
PANEL 13
14 TXD
15
16 RXD
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J4
1 RX AUD +
2 RX AUD
3 XMT KEY B
4 TX AUD +
5 TX AUD
6 XMT KEY B
7 RESERVED
8 XMT KEY
9 KEY RET
J5
1 RX AUD +
2 RX AUD
3 XMT KEY B
4 TX AUD +
5 TX AUD
6 XMT KEY B
7 RESERVED
8 XMT KEY
9 RESERVED
5710A-200
Figure 6-2. RF-5710A Modem Interconnect Schematic Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
6-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
WHT
A2 BLK
B
A5W2
C A
DGND LCDBLT
A5
FRONT PANEL
C ASSEMBLY
12004120001
NOTE
The pin designations of connectors A1J2
and A1J3 depend upon the electrical mode of
the interface. The pins are defined in Tables
2-2, 2-3, and 2-4 for each of the electrical
modes supported.
5710A-201
Figure 6-2. RF-5710A Modem Interconnect Schematic Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
6-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-10
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7
7.1 INTRODUCTION
Paragraph 7.2 provides the alignment and adjustment procedures for the Shop Replaceable Units (SRUs) in the
RF-5710A Modem. Paragraph 7.3 provides general removal and replacement guidelines. Paragraph 7.4 provides
the procedures for removing and replacing the RF-5710A Modem SRUs and fuses. These SRUs and fuses are
listed in Table 7-1 with a reference to the corresponding removal and replacement procedure paragraph.
7.1.1 Master Tools and Materials List
Table 7-2 lists the tools, test equipment, and materials required for the procedures in this chapter. The first
column, Item, provides the item number for the tools referenced in each removal and replacement procedure.
Table 7-1. SRU and Fuse Removal and Replacement Paragraph References
Paragraph
SRU Name
Reference
A1 HF Modem Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Assembly 7.4.1
A2 Power Supply Assembly 7.4.2
A3 AC Input Filter Assembly 7.4.3
A5 Front Panel Assembly 7.4.4
F1 Internal Fuse 7.4.5
F2 External Fuse 7.4.6
Table 7-2. Master Tools and Materials List

CAGE
Item Description Part Number
Code
1 Screwdriver, #1 cross-tip X101 96508
2 Screwdriver, #2 cross-tip X102 96508
3 Nut Driver, 3/16-Inch ND106 55719
4 Crescent Wrench, Adjustable AD6 55719
5 Screwdriver, Slotted 1/8 x 3-Inch SDD304 55719
7.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENTS

7.2.1 General
The RF-5710A Modem requires no Level III adjustments or alignments.
7.3 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INFORMATION
The following paragraphs contain the repair procedures which consist of removing and replacing all SRUs and
fuses authorized for Level III maintenance.
7-1
7.3.1 Safety
Remove power from the RF-5710A Modem before starting any repairs.
WARNING
Voltages hazardous to human life are present if power is not

removed from the unit. Failure to remove power from the unit
can cause injury or death to personnel.
7.3.2 Level III Repair
Repairs are made by removing and replacing the assemblies and fuses listed in Table 7-1.
CAUTION
Some of the assemblies in the RF-5710A Modem can be

damaged by static discharge. Failure to take the proper
precautions may damage these assemblies. Use a ground strap
and an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) mat whenever removing or
replacing these assemblies and modules. For more information,
refer to the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual.
7.3.3 Attaching Hardware
Table 8-6 lists the attaching hardware that is removed and replaced while performing the procedures in this
chapter. Column 1, Letter Code, provides the letter which is referenced on Figure 8-1, the illustrated parts list and
throughout the removal and replacement procedures.
7.3.4 Repair Tips
When an assembly or module is removed from the unit, non-captive hardware should be stored at the time of
disassembly. Reuse this hardware when installing the assembly or module into the unit.
7.3.5 Tools
Use only the proper tools when performing maintenance tasks on the unit. Refer to Table 7-2. An incorrect size
screwdriver or wrench can damage hardware.
CAUTION
Failure to use the correct tool can damage hardware.

7.4 SRU AND FUSE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
The following procedures contain information for the removal and replacement of SRUs and fuses in the
RF-5710A Modem. See Figure 7-1 and refer to Table 7-2 while performing the procedures.
7-2
A2J2
(TO W1P2)
A
( 14 PLACES )
MP2
F1 A3
A2 AC INPUT
POWER SUPPLY FILTER ASSY
ASSY
FUSE TRAY
(P/O A3)
F2
G
(2 PLACES)
MP5
B C
(4 PLACES) (8 PLACES)
A2J1
D
(TO A5W1P1) E
A2P1
(TO A3J1)
A1
HF MODEM
PWB ASSY
A5S1 B
(8 PLACES)
A1J13
(TO W1P1)
F
(4 PLACES)
A1J10
I (TO A5P2)
(4 PLACES)
A5
FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
A1J11 A
(TO A5W2P1) (3 PLACES)
5710B007A
Figure 7-1. RF-5710A Modem Master Connection and Hardware Locations
7-3
7.4.1 A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Removal and Replacement

The following paragraphs provide instructions for the removal and replacement of A1 HF Modem PWB
Assembly.
WARNING

CAUTION
A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly can be damaged by static

discharge. Failure to take the proper precautions may damage
this assembly.
CAUTION
Safeguard cables from being pinched or damaged while

removing and replacing assemblies.
7.4.1.1 A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Removal
Perform the following procedure to remove A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly:
NOTE
Removing MP5 Power Supply cover makes removal of A1 HF
Modem PWB Assembly easier, but is not necessary. Refer to
Paragraph 7.4.2.
a. Disconnect the AC power cord from the power source.
b. Disconnect the AC power cord from the modem.
c. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to remove the 14 screws (A) that secure MP2 Modem cover.
d. Remove MP2 Modem cover.
CAUTION
When performing the next step, do not pull on the flex cable.
Use connector tabs to disconnect A5P2 from A1J10 to prevent
damage to the flex cable.
7-4
e. Disconnect A5P2 from A1J10, W1P1 from A1J13, and A5W2P1 from A1J11.
f. Use a 3/16-inch nut driver (Item 3) to remove the eight (8) standoffs (C) that secure J2, J3, J4, and J5 of
A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly to the rear panel.
g. Use an adjustable crescent wrench (Item 4) to remove the nut (D) and washer (E) that secure J1 of A1 HF
Modem PWB Assembly to the rear panel.
h. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the eight (8) screws (B) that secure A1 HF Modem
PWB Assembly to the floor of the chassis.
i. Remove A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly.
7.4.1.2 A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly Replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly:
a. Carefully install the replacement A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly into the chassis, and start the eight (8)
standoffs (C) that secure the assembly to the rear panel.
b. Start installing the eight (8) screws (B) that secure A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly to the floor of the
chassis. Do not tighten.
c. Use a 3/16-inch nut driver (Item 3) to tighten the eight (8) standoffs (C) that secure J2, J3, J4, and J5 of
A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly to the rear panel.
d. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the eight (8) screws (B) that secure A1 HF Modem
PWB Assembly to the floor of the chassis.
e. Use an adjustable crescent wrench (Item 4) to secure J1 of A1 HF Modem PWB Assembly to the rear
panel using the nut (D) and washer (E) removed in Paragraph 7.4.1.1, Step g.
f. Reconnect A5P2 to A1J10, W1P1 to A1J13, and A5W2P1 to A1J11.
g. If MP5 Power Supply cover and two (2) screws (B) were removed, reinstall them. Refer to
Paragraph 7.4.2.
h. Reinstall MP2 Modem cover.
i. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the 14 screws (A) that secure MP2 Modem cover.
j. Reconnect AC power.
7.4.2 A2 Power Supply Assembly Removal and Replacement
The following paragraphs provide instructions for the removal and replacement of A2 Power Supply Assembly.
WARNING

7-5
CAUTION
Some of the assemblies and modules in the RF-5710A Modem

can be damaged by static discharge. Failure to take the proper
precautions may damage these assemblies.
CAUTION

7.4.2.1 A2 Power Supply Assembly Removal
Perform the following procedure to remove A2 Power Supply Assembly:
b. Disconnect the AC power cord from the RF-5710A Modem.
e. Note the orientation of the A2 Power Supply Assembly in the chassis.
f. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the two screws (B) that secure MP5 Power Supply
cover to A2 Power Supply Assembly.
g. Remove MP5 Power Supply cover.
h. Disconnect A5W1P1 from A2J1, W1P2 from A2J2, and A3J1 from A2P1.
i. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the two screws (B) that secure A2 Power Supply
Assembly to the floor of the chassis.
j. Remove A2 Power Supply Assembly.
7.4.2.2 A2 Power Supply Assembly Replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace A2 Power Supply Assembly:
a. Install the replacement A2 Power Supply Assembly.
b. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the two screws (B) that secure A2 Power Supply
Assembly to the floor of the chassis.
c. Reconnect A5W1P1 to A2J1, W1P2 to A2J2, and A3J1 to A2P1.
d. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the two screws (B) that secure MP5 Power Supply
7-6
e. Reinstall MP2 Modem cover.

f. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the 14 screws (A) that secure MP2 Modem cover.
g. Reconnect AC power.
7.4.3 A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Removal and Replacement
The following paragraphs provide instructions for the removal and replacement of A3 AC Input Filter Assembly.
WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

7.4.3.1 A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Removal
Perform the following procedure to remove A3 AC Input Filter Assembly:
e. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to remove the two screws (G) that secure A3 AC Input Filter
Assembly to RF-5710A Modem chassis.
f. Disconnect A3J1 from A2P1.
g. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the two screws (B) that secure MP5 Power Supply
7-7
h. Remove MP5 Power Supply cover.

i. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to remove the three (3) screws (A) that secure the chassis bottom
to A5 Front Panel Assembly.
j. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the four (4) screws (F) that secure A5 Front Panel
Assembly to the sides of the chassis.
k. Pull A5 Front Panel Assembly away from the chassis and place face down on the bench.
l. Disconnect the P2 black wire and P3 white wire that connect the A3 AC Input Filter Assembly to switch
A5S1.
m. Remove A3 AC Input Filter Assembly from RF-5710A Modem chassis.
7.4.3.2 A3 AC Input Filter Assembly Replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace A3 AC Input Filter Assembly:
a. Install replacement A3 AC Input Filter Assembly through hole in RF-5710A Modem chassis.
b. Connect the P2 black wire and P3 white wire that connect the A3 AC Input Filter Assembly to switch
A5S1.
c. Reinstall A5 Front Panel Assembly.
d. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the four (4) screws (F)) that secure A5 Front Panel
e. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the three (3) screws (A) that secure the chassis bottom
f. Connect A3J1 to A2P1.
g. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the two screws (B) that secure MP5 Power Supply
h. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the two screws (G) that secure A3 AC Input Filter
Assembly to modem chassis.
i. Reinstall MP2 modem cover.
j. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the 14 screws (A) that secure MP2 modem cover.
k. Reconnect AC power.
7-8
7.4.4 A5 Front Panel Assembly Removal and Replacement

The following paragraphs provide instructions for the removal and replacement of A5 Front Panel Assembly.
WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

7.4.4.1 A5 Front Panel Assembly Removal
Perform the following procedure to remove A5 Front Panel Assembly:
NOTE
To remove the front panel, it is necessary to remove all rack
mount hardware.
7-9
e. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to remove the three (3) screws (A) that secure the chassis bottom
f. Disconnect A5W2P1 from A1J11.
g. Disconnect A5P2 from A1J10.
CAUTION
Do not pull on the flex cable. Use connector tabs to disconnect

A5P2 from A1J10 to prevent damage to the flex cable.
h. Disconnect A5W1P1 from A2J1.
i. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the four (4) screws (F) that secure A5 Front Panel
j. Pull A5 Front Panel Assembly away from the chassis and place face down on the bench.
k. Disconnect the P2 black wire and P3 white wire that connect the A3 AC Input Filter Assembly to switch
A5S1.
7.4.4.2 A5 Front Panel Assembly Replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace A5 Front Panel Assembly:
a. Connect the P2 black wire and P3 white wire that connect the A3 AC Input Filter Assembly to switch
A5S1.
b. Reinstall A5 Front Panel Assembly onto the chassis.
c. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the four (4) screws (F) that secure A5 Front Panel
d. Reconnect A5P2 to A1J10.
e. Reconnect A5W2P1 to A1J11.
f. Reconnect A5W1P1 to A2J1.
g. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the three (3) screws (A) that secure the chassis bottom
h. Reinstall MP2 Modem cover.
i. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the 14 screws (A) that secure MP2 Modem cover.
j. Reconnect AC power.
7-10
7.4.5 F1 Internal Fuse Removal and Replacement

The following paragraphs provide instructions for the removal and replacement of F1 internal fuse.
WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

7.4.5.1 F1 Internal Fuse Removal
Perform the following procedure to remove F1 internal fuse:
e. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to remove the two screws (B) that secure MP5 Power Supply
Cover to A2 Power Supply Assembly.
f. Remove MP5 Power Supply cover.
g. Remove the blown fuse (F1) located on A2 Power Supply Assembly next to A2J1 connector.
7-11
7.4.5.2 F1 Internal Fuse Replacement

Perform the following procedure to replace F1 internal fuse:
a. Replace the blown fuse with an equivalent fuse provided in the ancillary kit or from supply spares.
b. Replace MP5 Power Supply cover.
c. Use a #2 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 2) to tighten the two screws (B) that secure MP5 Power Supply
d. Replace MP2 Modem cover.
e. Use a #1 cross-tip screwdriver (Item 1) to tighten the 14 screws (A) that secure MP2 Modem cover.
f. Reconnect AC power.
7.4.6 F2 External Fuse Removal and Replacement
The following paragraphs provide instructions for the removal and replacement of F2 external fuse. The F2
external fuse is located inside A3 AC Input Filter Assembly and is rated at one-half the current-carrying capacity
of the F1 internal fuse.
7.4.6.1 F2 External Fuse Removal
Perform the following procedure to remove F2 external fuse:
c. Insert a slotted screwdriver (Item 5) into slot under fuse tray at the inside of AC receptacle to remove the
fuse tray from A3 AC Input Filter Assembly (located on the rear panel).
d. Remove the blown fuse.
7.4.6.2 F2 External Fuse Replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace F2 external fuse:
a. Replace the blown fuse with the spare kept in the front receptacle of the fuse tray.
b. Replace the spare fuse with an equivalent fuse provided in the ancillary kit or from supply spares.
c. Replace the fuse tray.
d. Reconnect AC power.
7-12
PARTS LIST
CHAPTER 8
PARTS LIST
8.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains RF-5710A Modem parts list information. This information can be used to identify parts
within the RF-5710A Modem and to place orders for those parts. This chapter is organized as follows:
Paragraph 8.2 Shop Replaceable Units (SRUs)
Paragraph 8.3 Parts Lists
8.2 SHOP REPLACEABLE UNITS (SRUS)

Table 8-1 lists the SRUs that make up the RF-5710A Modem. The reference designators, part numbers, and figure
number cross-references are provided. Figure 8-1 shows the locations of the SRUs, Miscellaneous Parts (MP),
and attaching hardware.
Table 8-1. List of RF-5710A Modem SRUs
Part Figure
Ref. Des. Item Name
Number Number
A1 HF Modem Printed Wiring Board (PWB) 12004-2000-01 7-1
Assembly
A2 Power Supply Assembly 10447-1050-001 7-1
A3 AC Input Filter Assembly 10447-1013-001 7-1
A5 Front Panel Assembly 12004-1200-01 7-1
8-1
PARTS LIST
A2J2
(TO W1P2)
A
( 14 PLACES )
MP2
F1 A3
A2 AC INPUT
POWER SUPPLY FILTER ASSY
ASSY
FUSE TRAY
(P/O A3)
F2
G
(2 PLACES)
MP5
B C
(4 PLACES) (8 PLACES)
A2J1
D
(TO A5W1P1) E
A2P1
(TO A3J1)
A1
HF MODEM
PWB ASSY
A5S1 B
(8 PLACES)
A1J13
(TO W1P1)
F
(4 PLACES)
A1J10
I (TO A5P2)
(4 PLACES)
A5
FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
A1J11 A
(TO A5W2P1) (3 PLACES)
Figure 8-1. RF-5710A Modem Illustrated Parts List
5710B007A
8-2
PARTS LIST
8.3 PARTS LISTS

Table 8-2 is the parts list for RF-5710A Modem subassemblies. Table 8-3 is the parts list for the RF-5710A
Modem ancillary kit. Table 8-4 provides the rack mount kit parts list. Table 8-5 provides a list of miscellaneous
parts for the RF-5710A Modem. These are items that are called out in a Chapter 7 procedure, are removed and
replaced during maintenance, or that can be damaged or lost. Reference designators and part numbers of the items
are listed. These miscellaneous items are also identified in Figure 7-1.
Table 8-6 lists the RF-5710A Modem attaching hardware. Item names, characteristics, and part numbers are
provided. These attaching hardware items are also identified in Figure 7-1.
Table 8-2. RF-5710A Modem Subassemblies

Ref. Desig. Part Number Description
A1 12004-2000-01 HF Modem PWB Assembly
A2 10447-1050-001 Power Supply Assembly
A3 10447-1013-001 AC Input Filter Assembly
A4 N/A Reserved for future use
A5 12004-1200-01 Front Panel Assembly
Table 8-3. RF-5710A Modem Ancillary Kit Parts List (12004-0021-01)

Quantity Part Number Description
1 W-0023 LINE CORD, 6 FT
5 F08-0004-001 FUSE F2, CER 5X20 MM, 1A, 250V Slow-Blow Fuse
5 F08-0002-002 FUSE F1, 5X20 MM, 2A, 250V
1 J22-0057-101 D CONN, 9S, SLDR CUP
1 J22-0057-103 D CONN, 25S, SLDR CUP
1 J22-0058-101 D CONN, 9P, SLDR CUP
1 J22-0058-103 D CONN, 25P, SLDR CUP
1 J55-0002-003 CONN D, SHELL, 25-Pin
2 J55-0002-005 CONN D, SHELL, 9-Pin
4 MP-4323 BUMPER BUTTON, GRAY (chassis feet for desktop use)
1 MS25281-R4 CLAMP CABLE 0.250 DIAM.
Table 8-4. RF-5710A Modem Rack Mount Kit Parts List (12004-0100-01)
Quantity Part Number Description
4 H-6610 PANEL SCREW, 103
2 H34-0022-001 NUT RETAINER
1 12004-0101-01 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1 12004-0105-01 MODEM, PSEUDO
2 12004-0115-01 SIDE BRACKET
8-3
PARTS LIST
Table 8-5. RF-5710A Modem Miscellaneous Parts List

Ref. Des. Item Name Part Number Figure Number
MP2 Modem Cover 12004-1120-01 7-1
MP5 Power Supply Cover 12004-1115-01 7-1
MP7 ID Plate 12004-1151-03 7-1
Table 8-6. List of Attaching Hardware

Letter Part Figure
Item Name
Code Number Number
A Flat Head Screw 4-40 x 3/16 H99-0001-005 7-1
B Pan Head Screw 6-32 x 1/4 H21-0001-104 7-1
C Standoff 4-40 x 3/16 M24308/26-1 7-1
D Nut used on BNC Connector J90-0022-101 7-1
E Lockwasher used on BNC Connector J90-0022-201 7-1
F Flat Head Screw 6-32 x 3/8 H99-0001-020 7-1
G Flat Head Screw 4-40 x 5/16 H99-0001-006 7-1
8-4
APPENDIX A
SPECIFICATIONS
MIL-STD-188-110B SERIAL (SINGLE-TONE) WAVEFORM MODE

Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400
Uncoded mode: 4800
Modes: Full or half-duplex
FEC Coding: 1/2 rate convolutional (except 4800 bps)
Interleaving Delay: 0, 1.2, or 9.6 seconds
Modulation: M-ary PSK, 2400 symbols/second
Multipath Tolerance: >6 milliseconds
Bandwidth: 3000 Hz (300 Hz 3300 Hz)
Doppler Offset Capability: 75 Hz
Doppler Tracking: 3.5 Hz/second
Equalization: Data Directed Equalization (patented)
Adaptive Filtering: Suppression of up to four interfering signals
STANAG 4285 WAVEFORM MODE

Uncoded mode: 1200, 2400, 3600
Mode: Full or half-duplex
FEC Coding: 1/2 rate (2/3 rate 2400 bps) convolutional
(coded mode)
Interleaving Delay: 0 (uncoded), 0.85, or 10.24 seconds
A-1
APPENDIX A
SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
STANAG 4529 WAVEFORM MODE
Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200
Uncoded mode: 600, 1200, 1800
FEC Coding: 1/2 rate (2/3 rate 1200bps) convolutional

(coded mode)
Interleaving Delay: 0 (uncoded), 1.71, or 20.48 seconds
Bandwidth: 1240 Hz
Center Frequency: Selectable between 800 Hz 2400 Hz in 50 Hz

increments
Doppler Offset Capability: 37.5 Hz
STANAG 5066 Annex G WAVEFORM MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)
Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 3200, 4800, 6400, 8000, 9600, 12,800
FEC Coding: 3/4 rate convolutional
Interleaving Delay: 0, 0.705, 10.575, 21.5
Modulation: QAM/PSK, 2400 symbols/second
A-2
APPENDIX A
MIL-STD-188-110B MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 3200,
4800, 6400, 8000, 9600
Uncoded mode: 4800, 12,800
FEC Coding: 1/2 and 3/4 rate convolutional
Interleaving Delay: .24, .72, 2.16, 4.32, 8.64, 17.28
Doppler Tracking: 3.5 Hz/second (Doppler Fast)
1.0 Hz/second (Doppler Slow)
Equalization: Data Directed Equalization
Adaptive Filtering: Adaptive Filtering: Suppression of up to 4
interfering signals (752400 bps only)
MIL-STD-188-110B-Appendix F MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 19,200, 16,000, 12,800, 9600
Bandwidth: 2 channels, each channel
3000 Hz (300 Hz 3300 Hz)
(ISB or 2 SSB channels)
A-3
APPENDIX A
MIL-STD-188-110B-Appendix F MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only) Continued

MIL-STD-188-110B 39TONE WAVEFORM MODE

Modes: Full or half-duplex
FEC Coding: Reed-Solomon Code
Interleaving Delay: Up to 10 seconds
Modulation: 4 DPSK on each tone
Multipath Tolerance: <4.72 milliseconds
STANAG 4539 Annex B Section 4 MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 3200, 4800, 6400, 8000, 9600
Uncoded mode: 12,800
A-4
APPENDIX A
STANAG 4415 WAVEFORM MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 75
FEC Coding: 1/2 Rate Convolutional
Interleaving Delay: 1.2, or 9.6 seconds
Modulation: 4-ary Orthogonal Walsh modulation,
2400 symbols/second
STANAG 4481-P WAVEFORM MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): Coded mode: 300
Interleaving Delay: 10.24 seconds
Modulation: M-ary PSK
Multipath Tolerance: > 6 milliseconds
Bandwidth: 300 Hz (300 3300 Hz)
A-5
APPENDIX A
STANAG 4481-F WAVEFORM MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): 75
Interleaving Delay: 10.24 seconds
Modulation: M-ary PSK
Multipath Tolerance: > 6 milliseconds
Bandwidth: 300 Hz (300 3300 Hz)
FSK Frequency: Center Frequency = 2000 Hz, 425Hz
Receive Tuning: Center Frequency 200 Hz, tunable in 5 Hz
increments
STANAG 5065 WAVEFORM MODE (RF-5710A-MD001 only)

Data Rates (bps): MSK: 300
FSK: 75
FEC Coding: Wagner code (MSK)
Modulation: MSK, FSK
Bandwidth: 360 Hz (MSK), 235 Hz (FSK)
Center Frequency: 975 Hz
A-6
APPENDIX A
FSK WAVEFORM MODES
FSK Narrow Shift (FSKNS): Center frequency = 2805 Hz, Shift = 42.5 Hz
Data Rates (bps): Half and full duplex: 50 (async only), 75
FSK Wide Shift (FSKWS): Center frequency = 2000 Hz, Shift = 425 Hz
Data Rates (bps): 50 (async only), 75, 100 150, 300, 600
FSK Alternate Wide Shift (FSKA): Center frequency = 2000 Hz, Shift = 85 Hz
Data Rates (bps): 50 (async only), 75, 100, 150
FSK Variable (FSKV): Programmable mark/space frequency;
Range: 50 2999 Hz, tuneable in 1 Hz increments
Data Rates (bps): 50 (async only), 75, 100, 150, 300, 600
Receive Tuning: Center frequency 200 Hz, tuneable in 5 Hz
increments
MECHANICAL
Size: 1.75 H x 8.38 W x 12.0 D inches
4.45 H x 21.27 W x 30.48 cm
Weight: 4 lbs.(1.8 kg)
Shock: MIL-STD-810E, Method 516.4, Procedure I,
Functional (40 G, 11 msec duration)
Vibration: MIL-STD-810E, Method 514.4, Category 9,
Shipboard
MIL-STD-810D, Category 1, Basic Transport
ENVIRONMENTAL
Storage Temperature: 40 C to +80 C
Operating Temperature: 0 C to +50 C
Humidity: 0% to 95%, non-condensing
ELECTRICAL
Power Consumption: 12.5 watts typical, 15 watts maximum
Power Requirements: 85 Vac 264 Vac, 47 Hz 440 Hz
Receive Audio: Transformer coupled, +10 dBm to 35 dBm
Transmit Audio: Transformer coupled, +10 dBm to 40 dBm,
adjustable
A-7
APPENDIX A
Transmit Keyline: Open collector transistor driver,

50 mA sink capability,
up to +45 Vdc open circuit voltage.
Closure to signal ground to key,
open to unkey.
Secondary Transmit Keyline: Contact closure, 200 mA bidirectional current

capability, up to 45 V open circuit voltage
magnitude. Contact closed to key, open to unkey.
Data Terminal Interface: EIA RS-232D, EIA RS-422 balanced, EIA RS-423
unbalanced, MIL-STD-188-114 unbalanced
Selectable MIL-STD-188/RS-232 polarity

SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE
Transmit Clock Source: Internal, external, or recovered (transmit DATA)
Data Rate (bps): 75, 100, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3200,
3600, 4800, 6400, 8000, 9600, 12800, 16000, 19200
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE
Data Rate (bps): 50, 75, 100, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200
Stop bits: 1 or 2
Parity: Odd, even, or none
Flow Control: Clear-To-Send (CTS) or XON/XOFF
Character Lengths: 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits

REMOTE CONTROL TERMINAL INTERFACE
Asynchronous Serial Interface: EIA RS-232D, EIA RS-422 balanced, EIA RS-423
unbalanced, EIA RS-485 multi-drop bus
Protocol: ASCII character based with selectable protocols

(Harris-defined protocol or STANAG 5066 Annex E
protocol)
Data Rate (bps) RF-5710A-MD001: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

38400, 57600, 115200
Data Rate (bps) RF-5710A-MD002: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Stop Bits: 1 or 2
Parity: Odd, even, or none
Character Lengths: 7 or 8 bits
A-8
TECHNICAL PUBLICATION
EVALUATION FORM
To the User of this Instruction Manual:
HARRIS Corporation, RF Communications Division continually evaluates its technical publications for
completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by completing and
returning this form. Please specify section, page number, figure or table number where applicable.
MANUAL TITLE:
MANUAL NUMBER: REVISION: COVER DATE:
GENERAL EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR
TEXT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
SETUP/ALIGNMENT INST. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TROUBLESHOOTING INST. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TABLES [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
ILLUSTRATIONS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
PARTS LISTS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
CHAPTER EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR
INTRODUCTION/GENERAL INFORMATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OPERATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
FUNCTIONAL DESC/THEORY OF OPERATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TROUBLESHOOTING [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
DOCUMENTATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
INSTALLATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
ACCESSORIES [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
GENERAL COMMENTS: Please include your suggestions for improvements to the manual. Specify chapter,
page, paragraph, figure number, or table number as applicable. Attach examples or extra pages if more
space is needed.
CUT HERE LEAF-043A MAP

NAME: DATE:
CUT HERE
COMPANY:
ADDRESS:
CITY: STATE:
ZIP: COUNTRY:
PHONE NUMBER (INCLUDE AREA CODE):
NOTE
U.S. POSTAL REGULATIONS NO LONGER PERMIT THE USE OF STAPLES. PLEASE SEAL THIS FORM WITH TAPE.
MAKE FIRST FOLD HERE
MAKE LAST FOLD HERE
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 4033 ROCHESTER, N.Y.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
HARRIS CORPORATION
RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
1680 UNIVERSITY AVENUE
ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14610-1887
ATTN: TECHNICAL SERVICES

RF Communications Division 1680 University Ave Rochester, NY USA 14610
Tel: 716-244-5830. Fax: 716-242-4755 www.harris.com

Nav

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Nav

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0135-4300

Imaging and Data Products

next level solutions

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval.

Harris Corporation Telephone: (716) 244-5830

WHAT IS NOT COVERED We regret that we cannot be responsible for:

Defects or failures caused by buyer or user abuse or misuse.

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

When an Adult Stops Breathing

1 Does the Person

7 Check for Pulse

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION Continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION Continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION Continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION Continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 5 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 7 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued

CHAPTER 7 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE Continued

CHAPTER 8 PARTS LIST

LIST OF FIGURES Continued

1-1 RF-5710A Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

This page intentionally left blank.

CAUTION Used when there is a possibility of damage to equipment

NOTE Used to alert personnel to a condition that requires emphasis

2. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY

c. Power to the equipment must be removed before a piece of equipment is removed.

1. Shut off power.

2. Call for help.

3. Administer first aid if qualified.

DO NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT ALONE

TURN OFF POWER AND GROUND CAPACITORS

KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

DO NOT BYPASS INTERLOCKS

USE CARE HANDLING HEAVY EQUIPMENT

HEED WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

5. EXPLANATION OF HAZARD SYMBOLS

Figure 1-1. RF-5710A HF/LF Modem

CAUTION Paragraph 2.2.3.1 Do not daisy chain ground connections.

WARNING Paragraph 2.5.1 Use proper grounding before energizing equipment.

WARNING Paragraph 7.3.1 Voltages hazardous to human life are present.

CAUTION Paragraph 7.3.5 Use the correct tool.